blob: 5b846a518d3808107a221525e1077df8010f6790 [file] [log] [blame]
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00001/*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\
2|* *|
3|* The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure *|
4|* *|
5|* This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source *|
6|* License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. *|
7|* *|
8|*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*|
9|* *|
10|* This header provides a public inferface to a Clang library for extracting *|
11|* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *|
12|* Clang C++ API. *|
13|* *|
14\*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/
15
Benjamin Kramer2f5db8b2014-08-13 16:25:19 +000016#ifndef LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
17#define LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000018
Chandler Carruthaacafe52009-12-17 09:27:29 +000019#include <time.h>
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +000020
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000021#include "clang-c/Platform.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0b9682e2014-02-25 03:59:23 +000022#include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000023#include "clang-c/CXString.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis09a439d2014-02-25 03:59:16 +000024#include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000025
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1c4db8d2012-11-06 21:21:49 +000026/**
27 * \brief The version constants for the libclang API.
28 * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions.
29 * CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes.
30 *
31 * The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI
32 * compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable.
33 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000034#define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0
Saleem Abdulrasool79c69712015-09-05 18:53:43 +000035#define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 31
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000036
37#define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) ( \
38 ((major) * 10000) \
39 + ((minor) * 1))
40
41#define CINDEX_VERSION CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE( \
42 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
43 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR )
44
45#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) \
46 #major"."#minor
47#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \
48 CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor)
49
50#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE( \
51 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
52 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR)
53
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000054#ifdef __cplusplus
55extern "C" {
56#endif
57
Douglas Gregor4a4e0eb2011-02-23 17:45:25 +000058/** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000059 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000060 * The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000061 * facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST),
62 * loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating
63 * physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other
64 * facilities that support Clang-based development tools.
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000065 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000066 * This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000067 * representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to
68 * maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next,
69 * providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000070 *
71 * To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000072 * functions are prefixed with "clang_".
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000073 *
74 * @{
75 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000076
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000077/**
78 * \brief An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would
79 * typically be linked together into an executable or library.
80 */
81typedef void *CXIndex;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000082
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000083/**
84 * \brief A single translation unit, which resides in an index.
85 */
Ted Kremenek7df92ae2010-11-17 23:24:11 +000086typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000087
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000088/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000089 * \brief Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through
90 * to various callbacks and visitors.
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000091 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000092typedef void *CXClientData;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000093
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +000094/**
95 * \brief Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk.
96 *
97 * Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the
98 * system along with the current contents of that file that have not
99 * yet been saved to disk.
100 */
101struct CXUnsavedFile {
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000102 /**
103 * \brief The file whose contents have not yet been saved.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000104 *
105 * This file must already exist in the file system.
106 */
107 const char *Filename;
108
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000109 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000110 * \brief A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000111 */
112 const char *Contents;
113
114 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000115 * \brief The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000116 */
117 unsigned long Length;
118};
119
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000120/**
121 * \brief Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates
122 * whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to
123 * it being deprecated or unavailable.
124 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000125enum CXAvailabilityKind {
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000126 /**
127 * \brief The entity is available.
128 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000129 CXAvailability_Available,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000130 /**
131 * \brief The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is
132 * not recommended).
133 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000134 CXAvailability_Deprecated,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000135 /**
136 * \brief The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error.
137 */
Erik Verbruggen2e657ff2011-10-06 07:27:49 +0000138 CXAvailability_NotAvailable,
139 /**
140 * \brief The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be
141 * an error.
142 */
143 CXAvailability_NotAccessible
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000144};
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +0000145
146/**
147 * \brief Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor.
148 */
149typedef struct CXVersion {
150 /**
151 * \brief The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative
152 * value indicates that there is no version number at all.
153 */
154 int Major;
155 /**
156 * \brief The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value
157 * will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for
158 * version '10'.
159 */
160 int Minor;
161 /**
162 * \brief The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value
163 * will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided,
164 * e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'.
165 */
166 int Subminor;
167} CXVersion;
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000168
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +0000169/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000170 * \brief Provides a shared context for creating translation units.
171 *
172 * It provides two options:
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000173 *
174 * - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local"
175 * declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000176 * is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000177 * header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations
178 * will be enumerated.
179 *
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000180 * Here is an example:
181 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000182 * \code
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000183 * // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1
184 * Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000185 *
186 * // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command:
187 * // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch"
188 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch");
189 *
190 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch'
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000191 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
Douglas Gregor990b5762010-01-20 21:37:00 +0000192 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000193 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
194 *
195 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols
196 * // from 'IndexTest.pch'.
Daniel Dunbard0159262010-01-25 00:43:14 +0000197 * char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" };
198 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args,
199 * 0, 0);
Douglas Gregorfed36b12010-01-20 23:57:43 +0000200 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
201 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000202 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000203 * \endcode
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000204 *
205 * This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via
206 * -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks
207 * (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler).
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000208 */
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000209CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH,
210 int displayDiagnostics);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000211
Douglas Gregor408bb742010-02-08 23:03:06 +0000212/**
213 * \brief Destroy the given index.
214 *
215 * The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created
216 * within that index have been destroyed.
217 */
Daniel Dunbar11089662009-12-03 01:54:28 +0000218CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000219
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000220typedef enum {
221 /**
222 * \brief Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed.
223 */
224 CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0,
225
226 /**
227 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing
228 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000229 *
230 * Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit,
231 * #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000232 */
233 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1,
234
235 /**
236 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing
237 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000238 *
239 * Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt,
240 * #clang_annotateTokens
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000241 */
242 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2,
243
244 /**
245 * \brief Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use
246 * background priority.
247 */
248 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll =
249 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing |
250 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing
251
252} CXGlobalOptFlags;
253
254/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000255 * \brief Sets general options associated with a CXIndex.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000256 *
257 * For example:
258 * \code
259 * CXIndex idx = ...;
260 * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx,
261 * clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) |
262 * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing);
263 * \endcode
264 *
265 * \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags.
266 */
267CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options);
268
269/**
270 * \brief Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex.
271 *
272 * \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that
273 * are associated with the given CXIndex object.
274 */
275CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex);
276
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000277/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000278 * \defgroup CINDEX_FILES File manipulation routines
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000279 *
280 * @{
281 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000282
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000283/**
284 * \brief A particular source file that is part of a translation unit.
285 */
286typedef void *CXFile;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000287
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000288
289/**
290 * \brief Retrieve the complete file and path name of the given file.
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000291 */
Ted Kremenekc560b682010-02-17 00:41:20 +0000292CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getFileName(CXFile SFile);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000293
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000294/**
295 * \brief Retrieve the last modification time of the given file.
296 */
Douglas Gregor249c1212009-10-31 15:48:08 +0000297CINDEX_LINKAGE time_t clang_getFileTime(CXFile SFile);
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000298
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000299/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac08b262013-01-26 04:52:52 +0000300 * \brief Uniquely identifies a CXFile, that refers to the same underlying file,
301 * across an indexing session.
302 */
303typedef struct {
304 unsigned long long data[3];
305} CXFileUniqueID;
306
307/**
308 * \brief Retrieve the unique ID for the given \c file.
309 *
310 * \param file the file to get the ID for.
311 * \param outID stores the returned CXFileUniqueID.
312 * \returns If there was a failure getting the unique ID, returns non-zero,
313 * otherwise returns 0.
314*/
315CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFileUniqueID(CXFile file, CXFileUniqueID *outID);
316
317/**
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000318 * \brief Determine whether the given header is guarded against
319 * multiple inclusions, either with the conventional
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000320 * \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once.
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000321 */
322CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
323clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu, CXFile file);
324
325/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000326 * \brief Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit.
327 *
328 * \param tu the translation unit
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000329 *
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000330 * \param file_name the name of the file.
331 *
332 * \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu,
333 * or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit.
334 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000335CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu,
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000336 const char *file_name);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000337
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000338/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac3997e2014-08-16 00:26:19 +0000339 * \brief Returns non-zero if the \c file1 and \c file2 point to the same file,
340 * or they are both NULL.
341 */
342CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_File_isEqual(CXFile file1, CXFile file2);
343
344/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000345 * @}
346 */
347
348/**
349 * \defgroup CINDEX_LOCATIONS Physical source locations
350 *
351 * Clang represents physical source locations in its abstract syntax tree in
352 * great detail, with file, line, and column information for the majority of
353 * the tokens parsed in the source code. These data types and functions are
354 * used to represent source location information, either for a particular
355 * point in the program or for a range of points in the program, and extract
356 * specific location information from those data types.
357 *
358 * @{
359 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000360
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000361/**
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000362 * \brief Identifies a specific source location within a translation
363 * unit.
364 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000365 * Use clang_getExpansionLocation() or clang_getSpellingLocation()
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000366 * to map a source location to a particular file, line, and column.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000367 */
368typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000369 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000370 unsigned int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000371} CXSourceLocation;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000372
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000373/**
Daniel Dunbar02968e52010-02-14 10:02:57 +0000374 * \brief Identifies a half-open character range in the source code.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000375 *
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000376 * Use clang_getRangeStart() and clang_getRangeEnd() to retrieve the
377 * starting and end locations from a source range, respectively.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000378 */
379typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000380 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000381 unsigned begin_int_data;
382 unsigned end_int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000383} CXSourceRange;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000384
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000385/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000386 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source location.
387 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000388CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getNullLocation(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000389
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000390/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000391 * \brief Determine whether two source locations, which must refer into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000392 * the same translation unit, refer to exactly the same point in the source
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000393 * code.
394 *
395 * \returns non-zero if the source locations refer to the same location, zero
396 * if they refer to different locations.
397 */
398CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalLocations(CXSourceLocation loc1,
399 CXSourceLocation loc2);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000400
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000401/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000402 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column
403 * in a particular translation unit.
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000404 */
405CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu,
406 CXFile file,
407 unsigned line,
408 unsigned column);
David Chisnall2e16ac52010-10-15 17:07:39 +0000409/**
410 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset
411 * in a particular translation unit.
412 */
413CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu,
414 CXFile file,
415 unsigned offset);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000416
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000417/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25f7af12013-04-12 17:06:51 +0000418 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in a system header.
419 */
420CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isInSystemHeader(CXSourceLocation location);
421
422/**
Stefanus Du Toitdb51c632013-08-08 17:48:14 +0000423 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in the main file of
424 * the corresponding translation unit.
425 */
426CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isFromMainFile(CXSourceLocation location);
427
428/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000429 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source range.
430 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000431CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getNullRange(void);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000432
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000433/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000434 * \brief Retrieve a source range given the beginning and ending source
435 * locations.
436 */
437CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getRange(CXSourceLocation begin,
438 CXSourceLocation end);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000439
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000440/**
Douglas Gregor757e38b2011-07-23 19:35:14 +0000441 * \brief Determine whether two ranges are equivalent.
442 *
443 * \returns non-zero if the ranges are the same, zero if they differ.
444 */
445CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalRanges(CXSourceRange range1,
446 CXSourceRange range2);
447
448/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +0000449 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p range is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000450 */
Erik Verbruggend610b0f2011-10-06 12:11:57 +0000451CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Range_isNull(CXSourceRange range);
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000452
453/**
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000454 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
455 * the given source location.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000456 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000457 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
458 * location of the macro expansion.
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000459 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000460 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
461 * into its parts.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000462 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000463 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000464 * source location points.
465 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000466 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000467 * source location points.
468 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000469 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
470 * source location points.
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000471 *
472 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
473 * buffer to which the given source location points.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000474 */
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000475CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getExpansionLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
476 CXFile *file,
477 unsigned *line,
478 unsigned *column,
479 unsigned *offset);
480
481/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000482 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
483 * the given source location, as specified in a # line directive.
484 *
485 * Example: given the following source code in a file somefile.c
486 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000487 * \code
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000488 * #123 "dummy.c" 1
489 *
490 * static int func(void)
491 * {
492 * return 0;
493 * }
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000494 * \endcode
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000495 *
496 * the location information returned by this function would be
497 *
498 * File: dummy.c Line: 124 Column: 12
499 *
500 * whereas clang_getExpansionLocation would have returned
501 *
502 * File: somefile.c Line: 3 Column: 12
503 *
504 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
505 * into its parts.
506 *
507 * \param filename [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the filename of the
508 * source location. Note that filenames returned will be for "virtual" files,
509 * which don't necessarily exist on the machine running clang - e.g. when
510 * parsing preprocessed output obtained from a different environment. If
511 * a non-NULL value is passed in, remember to dispose of the returned value
512 * using \c clang_disposeString() once you've finished with it. For an invalid
513 * source location, an empty string is returned.
514 *
515 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line number of the
516 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
517 *
518 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column number of the
519 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
520 */
521CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getPresumedLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
522 CXString *filename,
523 unsigned *line,
524 unsigned *column);
525
526/**
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000527 * \brief Legacy API to retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented
528 * by the given source location.
529 *
530 * This interface has been replaced by the newer interface
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000531 * #clang_getExpansionLocation(). See that interface's documentation for
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000532 * details.
533 */
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000534CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInstantiationLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
535 CXFile *file,
536 unsigned *line,
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000537 unsigned *column,
538 unsigned *offset);
Douglas Gregor47751d62010-01-26 03:07:15 +0000539
540/**
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000541 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
542 * the given source location.
543 *
544 * If the location refers into a macro instantiation, return where the
545 * location was originally spelled in the source file.
546 *
547 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
548 * into its parts.
549 *
550 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
551 * source location points.
552 *
553 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
554 * source location points.
555 *
556 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
557 * source location points.
558 *
559 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
560 * buffer to which the given source location points.
561 */
562CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getSpellingLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
563 CXFile *file,
564 unsigned *line,
565 unsigned *column,
566 unsigned *offset);
567
568/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis56be7162013-01-04 18:30:13 +0000569 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
570 * the given source location.
571 *
572 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, return where the macro was
573 * expanded or where the macro argument was written, if the location points at
574 * a macro argument.
575 *
576 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
577 * into its parts.
578 *
579 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
580 * source location points.
581 *
582 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
583 * source location points.
584 *
585 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
586 * source location points.
587 *
588 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
589 * buffer to which the given source location points.
590 */
591CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getFileLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
592 CXFile *file,
593 unsigned *line,
594 unsigned *column,
595 unsigned *offset);
596
597/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000598 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the first character within a
599 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000600 */
601CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeStart(CXSourceRange range);
602
603/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000604 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the last character within a
605 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000606 */
607CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeEnd(CXSourceRange range);
608
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000609/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000610 * \brief Identifies an array of ranges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000611 */
612typedef struct {
613 /** \brief The number of ranges in the \c ranges array. */
614 unsigned count;
615 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000616 * \brief An array of \c CXSourceRanges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000617 */
618 CXSourceRange *ranges;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000619} CXSourceRangeList;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000620
621/**
622 * \brief Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000623 *
624 * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
625 * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000626 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000627CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu,
628 CXFile file);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000629
630/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000631 * \brief Destroy the given \c CXSourceRangeList.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000632 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000633CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeSourceRangeList(CXSourceRangeList *ranges);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000634
635/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000636 * @}
637 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000638
639/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000640 * \defgroup CINDEX_DIAG Diagnostic reporting
641 *
642 * @{
643 */
644
645/**
646 * \brief Describes the severity of a particular diagnostic.
647 */
648enum CXDiagnosticSeverity {
649 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000650 * \brief A diagnostic that has been suppressed, e.g., by a command-line
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000651 * option.
652 */
653 CXDiagnostic_Ignored = 0,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000654
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000655 /**
656 * \brief This diagnostic is a note that should be attached to the
657 * previous (non-note) diagnostic.
658 */
659 CXDiagnostic_Note = 1,
660
661 /**
662 * \brief This diagnostic indicates suspicious code that may not be
663 * wrong.
664 */
665 CXDiagnostic_Warning = 2,
666
667 /**
668 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed.
669 */
670 CXDiagnostic_Error = 3,
671
672 /**
673 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed such
674 * that future parser recovery is unlikely to produce useful
675 * results.
676 */
677 CXDiagnostic_Fatal = 4
678};
679
680/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000681 * \brief A single diagnostic, containing the diagnostic's severity,
682 * location, text, source ranges, and fix-it hints.
683 */
684typedef void *CXDiagnostic;
685
686/**
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000687 * \brief A group of CXDiagnostics.
688 */
689typedef void *CXDiagnosticSet;
690
691/**
692 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics in a CXDiagnosticSet.
693 */
694CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnosticsInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
695
696/**
697 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given CXDiagnosticSet.
698 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000699 * \param Diags the CXDiagnosticSet to query.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000700 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
701 *
702 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
703 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
704 */
705CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnosticInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags,
706 unsigned Index);
707
708
709/**
710 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
711 * \c clang_loadDiagnostics.
712 */
713enum CXLoadDiag_Error {
714 /**
715 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred.
716 */
717 CXLoadDiag_None = 0,
718
719 /**
720 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to
721 * deserialize diagnostics.
722 */
723 CXLoadDiag_Unknown = 1,
724
725 /**
726 * \brief Indicates that the file containing the serialized diagnostics
727 * could not be opened.
728 */
729 CXLoadDiag_CannotLoad = 2,
730
731 /**
732 * \brief Indicates that the serialized diagnostics file is invalid or
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000733 * corrupt.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000734 */
735 CXLoadDiag_InvalidFile = 3
736};
737
738/**
739 * \brief Deserialize a set of diagnostics from a Clang diagnostics bitcode
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000740 * file.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000741 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000742 * \param file The name of the file to deserialize.
743 * \param error A pointer to a enum value recording if there was a problem
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000744 * deserializing the diagnostics.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000745 * \param errorString A pointer to a CXString for recording the error string
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000746 * if the file was not successfully loaded.
747 *
748 * \returns A loaded CXDiagnosticSet if successful, and NULL otherwise. These
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000749 * diagnostics should be released using clang_disposeDiagnosticSet().
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000750 */
751CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_loadDiagnostics(const char *file,
752 enum CXLoadDiag_Error *error,
753 CXString *errorString);
754
755/**
756 * \brief Release a CXDiagnosticSet and all of its contained diagnostics.
757 */
758CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnosticSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
759
760/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000761 * \brief Retrieve the child diagnostics of a CXDiagnostic.
762 *
763 * This CXDiagnosticSet does not need to be released by
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000764 * clang_disposeDiagnosticSet.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000765 */
766CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_getChildDiagnostics(CXDiagnostic D);
767
768/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000769 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given
770 * translation unit.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000771 */
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000772CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
773
774/**
775 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit.
776 *
777 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
778 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
779 *
780 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
781 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
782 */
783CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit,
784 unsigned Index);
785
786/**
Ted Kremenekb4a8b052011-12-09 22:28:32 +0000787 * \brief Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a
788 * translation unit.
789 *
790 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
791 */
792CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet
793 clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
794
795/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000796 * \brief Destroy a diagnostic.
797 */
798CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000799
800/**
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000801 * \brief Options to control the display of diagnostics.
802 *
803 * The values in this enum are meant to be combined to customize the
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000804 * behavior of \c clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000805 */
806enum CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions {
807 /**
808 * \brief Display the source-location information where the
809 * diagnostic was located.
810 *
811 * When set, diagnostics will be prefixed by the file, line, and
812 * (optionally) column to which the diagnostic refers. For example,
813 *
814 * \code
815 * test.c:28: warning: extra tokens at end of #endif directive
816 * \endcode
817 *
818 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-source-location.
819 */
820 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceLocation = 0x01,
821
822 /**
823 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
824 * diagnostic, also include the column number.
825 *
826 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-column.
827 */
828 CXDiagnostic_DisplayColumn = 0x02,
829
830 /**
831 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
832 * diagnostic, also include information about source ranges in a
833 * machine-parsable format.
834 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000835 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000836 * \c -fdiagnostics-print-source-range-info.
837 */
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000838 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceRanges = 0x04,
839
840 /**
841 * \brief Display the option name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
842 *
843 * The option name displayed (e.g., -Wconversion) will be placed in brackets
844 * after the diagnostic text. This option corresponds to the clang flag
845 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-option.
846 */
847 CXDiagnostic_DisplayOption = 0x08,
848
849 /**
850 * \brief Display the category number associated with this diagnostic, if any.
851 *
852 * The category number is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
853 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
854 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=id.
855 */
856 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryId = 0x10,
857
858 /**
859 * \brief Display the category name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
860 *
861 * The category name is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
862 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
863 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=name.
864 */
865 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryName = 0x20
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000866};
867
868/**
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000869 * \brief Format the given diagnostic in a manner that is suitable for display.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000870 *
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000871 * This routine will format the given diagnostic to a string, rendering
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000872 * the diagnostic according to the various options given. The
873 * \c clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions() function returns the set of
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000874 * options that most closely mimics the behavior of the clang compiler.
875 *
876 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic to print.
877 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000878 * \param Options A set of options that control the diagnostic display,
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000879 * created by combining \c CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions values.
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000880 *
881 * \returns A new string containing for formatted diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000882 */
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000883CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_formatDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
884 unsigned Options);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000885
886/**
887 * \brief Retrieve the set of display options most similar to the
888 * default behavior of the clang compiler.
889 *
890 * \returns A set of display options suitable for use with \c
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000891 * clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000892 */
893CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions(void);
894
895/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000896 * \brief Determine the severity of the given diagnostic.
897 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000898CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXDiagnosticSeverity
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000899clang_getDiagnosticSeverity(CXDiagnostic);
900
901/**
902 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given diagnostic.
903 *
904 * This location is where Clang would print the caret ('^') when
905 * displaying the diagnostic on the command line.
906 */
907CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getDiagnosticLocation(CXDiagnostic);
908
909/**
910 * \brief Retrieve the text of the given diagnostic.
911 */
912CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticSpelling(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000913
914/**
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000915 * \brief Retrieve the name of the command-line option that enabled this
916 * diagnostic.
917 *
918 * \param Diag The diagnostic to be queried.
919 *
920 * \param Disable If non-NULL, will be set to the option that disables this
921 * diagnostic (if any).
922 *
923 * \returns A string that contains the command-line option used to enable this
924 * warning, such as "-Wconversion" or "-pedantic".
925 */
926CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticOption(CXDiagnostic Diag,
927 CXString *Disable);
928
929/**
930 * \brief Retrieve the category number for this diagnostic.
931 *
932 * Diagnostics can be categorized into groups along with other, related
933 * diagnostics (e.g., diagnostics under the same warning flag). This routine
934 * retrieves the category number for the given diagnostic.
935 *
936 * \returns The number of the category that contains this diagnostic, or zero
937 * if this diagnostic is uncategorized.
938 */
939CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticCategory(CXDiagnostic);
940
941/**
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000942 * \brief Retrieve the name of a particular diagnostic category. This
943 * is now deprecated. Use clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText()
944 * instead.
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000945 *
946 * \param Category A diagnostic category number, as returned by
947 * \c clang_getDiagnosticCategory().
948 *
949 * \returns The name of the given diagnostic category.
950 */
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000951CINDEX_DEPRECATED CINDEX_LINKAGE
952CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryName(unsigned Category);
953
954/**
955 * \brief Retrieve the diagnostic category text for a given diagnostic.
956 *
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000957 * \returns The text of the given diagnostic category.
958 */
959CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000960
961/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000962 * \brief Determine the number of source ranges associated with the given
963 * diagnostic.
964 */
965CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumRanges(CXDiagnostic);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000966
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000967/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000968 * \brief Retrieve a source range associated with the diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000969 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000970 * A diagnostic's source ranges highlight important elements in the source
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000971 * code. On the command line, Clang displays source ranges by
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000972 * underlining them with '~' characters.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000973 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000974 * \param Diagnostic the diagnostic whose range is being extracted.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000975 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000976 * \param Range the zero-based index specifying which range to
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000977 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000978 * \returns the requested source range.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000979 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000980CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getDiagnosticRange(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000981 unsigned Range);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000982
983/**
984 * \brief Determine the number of fix-it hints associated with the
985 * given diagnostic.
986 */
987CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumFixIts(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
988
989/**
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000990 * \brief Retrieve the replacement information for a given fix-it.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000991 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000992 * Fix-its are described in terms of a source range whose contents
993 * should be replaced by a string. This approach generalizes over
994 * three kinds of operations: removal of source code (the range covers
995 * the code to be removed and the replacement string is empty),
996 * replacement of source code (the range covers the code to be
997 * replaced and the replacement string provides the new code), and
998 * insertion (both the start and end of the range point at the
999 * insertion location, and the replacement string provides the text to
1000 * insert).
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001001 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001002 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic whose fix-its are being queried.
1003 *
1004 * \param FixIt The zero-based index of the fix-it.
1005 *
1006 * \param ReplacementRange The source range whose contents will be
1007 * replaced with the returned replacement string. Note that source
1008 * ranges are half-open ranges [a, b), so the source code should be
1009 * replaced from a and up to (but not including) b.
1010 *
1011 * \returns A string containing text that should be replace the source
1012 * code indicated by the \c ReplacementRange.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001013 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001014CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticFixIt(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001015 unsigned FixIt,
1016 CXSourceRange *ReplacementRange);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001017
1018/**
1019 * @}
1020 */
1021
1022/**
1023 * \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation
1024 *
1025 * The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy
1026 * translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or
1027 * by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit.
1028 *
1029 * @{
1030 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001031
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001032/**
1033 * \brief Get the original translation unit source file name.
1034 */
1035CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
1036clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit);
1037
1038/**
1039 * \brief Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided
1040 * command line arguments one would pass to the compiler.
1041 *
1042 * Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a
1043 * NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the
1044 * specified command line arguments.
1045 *
1046 * Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options
1047 * are ignored:
1048 *
1049 * '-c'
1050 * '-emit-ast'
1051 * '-fsyntax-only'
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001052 * '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored)
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001053 *
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001054 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1055 * associated.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001056 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001057 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001058 * source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args.
1059 *
1060 * \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
1061 * \p clang_command_line_args.
1062 *
1063 * \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1064 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1065 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1066 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001067 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001068 *
1069 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1070 * unsaved_files.
1071 *
1072 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
1073 * but may be required for code completion, including the contents of
Ted Kremenekde24a942010-04-12 18:47:26 +00001074 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1075 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1076 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001077 */
1078CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(
1079 CXIndex CIdx,
1080 const char *source_filename,
1081 int num_clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor57879fa2010-09-01 16:43:19 +00001082 const char * const *clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001083 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00001084 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001085
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001086/**
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001087 * \brief Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns
1088 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1089 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1090 * error codes.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001091 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001092CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnit(
1093 CXIndex CIdx,
1094 const char *ast_filename);
1095
1096/**
1097 * \brief Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast).
1098 *
1099 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1100 * \c CXTranslationUnit.
1101 *
1102 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
1103 */
1104CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_createTranslationUnit2(
1105 CXIndex CIdx,
1106 const char *ast_filename,
1107 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001108
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001109/**
1110 * \brief Flags that control the creation of translation units.
1111 *
1112 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1113 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1114 * constructing the translation unit.
1115 */
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001116enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags {
1117 /**
1118 * \brief Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are
1119 * needed.
1120 */
1121 CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0,
1122
1123 /**
1124 * \brief Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed"
1125 * preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations.
1126 *
1127 * Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory
1128 * and time to parse, since the information contained in the record
1129 * is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for
1130 * applications that require more detailed information about the
1131 * behavior of the preprocessor.
1132 */
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001133 CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01,
1134
1135 /**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001136 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001137 *
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001138 * When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic
1139 * analysis that is typically performed at the end of the
1140 * translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses
1141 * the completion of tentative declarations in C and of
1142 * instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in
1143 * C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the
1144 * intent of producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001145 */
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001146 CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02,
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001147
1148 /**
1149 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an
1150 * implicit precompiled header for the preamble.
1151 *
1152 * An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a
1153 * particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times
1154 * when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an
1155 * implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the
1156 * initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as
1157 * the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the
1158 * preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c
1159 * clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit
1160 * precompiled header to improve parsing performance.
1161 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001162 CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04,
1163
1164 /**
1165 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some
1166 * code-completion results with each reparse of the source file.
1167 *
1168 * Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that
1169 * introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of
1170 * code-completion operations.
1171 */
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001172 CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001173
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001174 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001175 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with
1176 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001177 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001178 * This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of
1179 * producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001180 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001181 CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10,
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001182
1183 /**
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001184 * \brief DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001185 *
1186 * Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001187 * we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001188 */
Erik Verbruggen6e922512012-04-12 10:11:59 +00001189 CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20,
1190
1191 /**
1192 * \brief Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while
1193 * parsing.
1194 *
1195 * This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while
1196 * ignoring the usages.
1197 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00001198 CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40,
1199
1200 /**
1201 * \brief Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be
1202 * included into the set of code completions returned from this translation
1203 * unit.
1204 */
1205 CXTranslationUnit_IncludeBriefCommentsInCodeCompletion = 0x80
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001206};
1207
1208/**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001209 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation
1210 * unit that is being edited.
1211 *
1212 * The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit()
1213 * to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times,
1214 * either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly
1215 * (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag
1216 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled
1217 * preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The
1218 * set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next.
1219 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001220CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void);
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001221
1222/**
1223 * \brief Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns
1224 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1225 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1226 * error codes.
1227 */
1228CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit
1229clang_parseTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx,
1230 const char *source_filename,
1231 const char *const *command_line_args,
1232 int num_command_line_args,
1233 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1234 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1235 unsigned options);
1236
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001237/**
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001238 * \brief Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
1239 * to that file.
1240 *
1241 * This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the
1242 * ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be
1243 * queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of
1244 * command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same
1245 * way that the compiler is configured on the command line.
1246 *
1247 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1248 * associated.
1249 *
1250 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001251 * source file is included in \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001252 *
1253 * \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1254 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1255 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1256 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001257 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001258 *
1259 * \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001260 * \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001261 *
1262 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00001263 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001264 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1265 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1266 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1267 *
1268 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1269 * unsaved_files.
1270 *
1271 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1272 * is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1273 * CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1274 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001275 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1276 * \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any
1277 * diagnostics produced by the compiler.
1278 *
1279 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001280 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001281CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode
1282clang_parseTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx,
1283 const char *source_filename,
1284 const char *const *command_line_args,
1285 int num_command_line_args,
1286 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1287 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1288 unsigned options,
1289 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1290
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001291/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00001292 * \brief Same as clang_parseTranslationUnit2 but requires a full command line
1293 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
1294 * library paths are relative to the binary.
1295 */
1296CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2FullArgv(
1297 CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename,
1298 const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args,
1299 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1300 unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1301
1302/**
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001303 * \brief Flags that control how translation units are saved.
1304 *
1305 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1306 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1307 * saving the translation unit.
1308 */
1309enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags {
1310 /**
1311 * \brief Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed.
1312 */
1313 CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0
1314};
1315
1316/**
1317 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation
1318 * unit.
1319 *
1320 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1321 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1322 * set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with
1323 * the most commonly-requested data.
1324 */
1325CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1326
1327/**
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001328 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
1329 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit().
1330 */
1331enum CXSaveError {
1332 /**
1333 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit.
1334 */
1335 CXSaveError_None = 0,
1336
1337 /**
1338 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save
1339 * the file.
1340 *
1341 * This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to
1342 * write the file.
1343 */
1344 CXSaveError_Unknown = 1,
1345
1346 /**
1347 * \brief Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt
1348 * to save the translation unit.
1349 *
1350 * Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be
1351 * extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic().
1352 */
1353 CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2,
1354
1355 /**
1356 * \brief Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow
1357 * invalid (e.g., NULL).
1358 */
1359 CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3
1360};
1361
1362/**
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001363 * \brief Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of
1364 * that translation unit on disk.
1365 *
1366 * Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved
1367 * into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a
1368 * new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or,
1369 * if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a
1370 * header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation
1371 * units.
1372 *
1373 * \param TU The translation unit to save.
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001374 *
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001375 * \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved.
1376 *
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001377 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1378 * is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1379 * CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1380 *
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001381 * \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError
1382 * enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was
1383 * saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred.
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001384 */
1385CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001386 const char *FileName,
1387 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001388
1389/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001390 * \brief Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object.
1391 */
1392CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001393
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001394/**
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001395 * \brief Flags that control the reparsing of translation units.
1396 *
1397 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1398 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1399 * reparsing the translation unit.
1400 */
1401enum CXReparse_Flags {
1402 /**
1403 * \brief Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed.
1404 */
1405 CXReparse_None = 0x0
1406};
1407
1408/**
1409 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation
1410 * unit.
1411 *
1412 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1413 * \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1414 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses
1415 * of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version
1416 * to the next.
1417 */
1418CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1419
1420/**
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001421 * \brief Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit.
1422 *
1423 * This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally
1424 * created the given translation unit, for example because those source files
1425 * have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The
1426 * source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it
1427 * was originally parsed.
1428 *
1429 * Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations
1430 * that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation
1431 * unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then
1432 * creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments.
1433 * However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation
1434 * unit using this routine.
1435 *
1436 * \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The
1437 * translation unit must originally have been built with
1438 * \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile().
1439 *
1440 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
1441 * unsaved_files.
1442 *
1443 * \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk
1444 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
1445 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1446 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1447 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1448 *
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001449 * \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags.
1450 * The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of
1451 * options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit.
1452 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001453 * \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001454 * returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001455 * invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is
1456 * \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this
1457 * routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum.
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001458 */
1459CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
1460 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001461 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1462 unsigned options);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001463
1464/**
1465 * \brief Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit.
1466 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001467enum CXTUResourceUsageKind {
1468 CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1,
1469 CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2,
1470 CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3,
1471 CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4,
Ted Kremenek21735e62011-04-28 04:10:31 +00001472 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5,
Ted Kremenekf5df0ce2011-04-28 04:53:38 +00001473 CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6,
Ted Kremenek8d587902011-04-28 20:36:42 +00001474 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7,
Ted Kremenek5e1ed7b2011-04-28 23:46:20 +00001475 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8,
1476 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9,
1477 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10,
Ted Kremenek2160a0d2011-05-04 01:38:46 +00001478 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11,
1479 CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12,
Ted Kremenek120992a2011-07-26 23:46:06 +00001480 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001481 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch = 14,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001482 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
1483 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END =
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001484 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001485
1486 CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001487 CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001488};
1489
1490/**
1491 * \brief Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001492 * the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed.
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001493 */
1494CINDEX_LINKAGE
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001495const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001496
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001497typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001498 /* \brief The memory usage category. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001499 enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind;
1500 /* \brief Amount of resources used.
1501 The units will depend on the resource kind. */
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001502 unsigned long amount;
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001503} CXTUResourceUsageEntry;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001504
1505/**
1506 * \brief The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories.
1507 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001508typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001509 /* \brief Private data member, used for queries. */
1510 void *data;
1511
1512 /* \brief The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */
1513 unsigned numEntries;
1514
1515 /* \brief An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory
1516 usage. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001517 CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001518
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001519} CXTUResourceUsage;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001520
1521/**
1522 * \brief Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001523 * should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage().
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001524 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001525CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001526
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001527CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001528
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001529/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001530 * @}
1531 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001532
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001533/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001534 * \brief Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to.
1535 */
1536enum CXCursorKind {
1537 /* Declarations */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001538 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001539 * \brief A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001540 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001541 *
1542 * Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind
1543 * of declaration; one can extract their location information,
1544 * spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind
1545 * of the declaration is not reported.
1546 */
1547 CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1,
1548 /** \brief A C or C++ struct. */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001549 CXCursor_StructDecl = 2,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001550 /** \brief A C or C++ union. */
1551 CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3,
1552 /** \brief A C++ class. */
1553 CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4,
1554 /** \brief An enumeration. */
1555 CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001556 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001557 * \brief A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a
1558 * struct, union, or C++ class.
1559 */
1560 CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6,
1561 /** \brief An enumerator constant. */
1562 CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7,
1563 /** \brief A function. */
1564 CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8,
1565 /** \brief A variable. */
1566 CXCursor_VarDecl = 9,
1567 /** \brief A function or method parameter. */
1568 CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001569 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001570 CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001571 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001572 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001573 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001574 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001575 /** \brief An Objective-C \@property declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001576 CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14,
1577 /** \brief An Objective-C instance variable. */
1578 CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15,
1579 /** \brief An Objective-C instance method. */
1580 CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16,
1581 /** \brief An Objective-C class method. */
1582 CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001583 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001584 CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001585 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001586 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19,
Saleem Abdulrasool993b2862015-08-12 03:21:44 +00001587 /** \brief A typedef. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001588 CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20,
Ted Kremenek225b8e32010-04-13 23:39:06 +00001589 /** \brief A C++ class method. */
1590 CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21,
Ted Kremenekbd67fb22010-05-06 23:38:21 +00001591 /** \brief A C++ namespace. */
1592 CXCursor_Namespace = 22,
Ted Kremenekb80cba52010-05-07 01:04:29 +00001593 /** \brief A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */
1594 CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23,
Douglas Gregor12bca222010-08-31 14:41:23 +00001595 /** \brief A C++ constructor. */
1596 CXCursor_Constructor = 24,
1597 /** \brief A C++ destructor. */
1598 CXCursor_Destructor = 25,
1599 /** \brief A C++ conversion function. */
1600 CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26,
Douglas Gregor713602b2010-08-31 17:01:39 +00001601 /** \brief A C++ template type parameter. */
1602 CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27,
1603 /** \brief A C++ non-type template parameter. */
1604 CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28,
1605 /** \brief A C++ template template parameter. */
1606 CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29,
1607 /** \brief A C++ function template. */
1608 CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30,
Douglas Gregor1fbaeb12010-08-31 19:02:00 +00001609 /** \brief A C++ class template. */
1610 CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31,
Douglas Gregorf96abb22010-08-31 19:31:58 +00001611 /** \brief A C++ class template partial specialization. */
1612 CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001613 /** \brief A C++ namespace alias declaration. */
1614 CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33,
Douglas Gregor01a430132010-09-01 03:07:18 +00001615 /** \brief A C++ using directive. */
1616 CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001617 /** \brief A C++ using declaration. */
Douglas Gregora9aa29c2010-09-01 19:52:22 +00001618 CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001619 /** \brief A C++ alias declaration */
1620 CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001621 /** \brief An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001622 CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001623 /** \brief An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001624 CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001625 /** \brief An access specifier. */
1626 CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001627
Ted Kremenek08de5c12010-05-19 21:51:10 +00001628 CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001629 CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001630
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001631 /* References */
1632 CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001633 CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001634 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41,
1635 CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42,
1636 /**
1637 * \brief A reference to a type declaration.
1638 *
1639 * A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not
1640 * declared. For example, given:
1641 *
1642 * \code
1643 * typedef unsigned size_type;
1644 * size_type size;
1645 * \endcode
1646 *
1647 * The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl),
1648 * while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor
1649 * referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type.
1650 */
1651 CXCursor_TypeRef = 43,
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00001652 CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44,
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001653 /**
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001654 * \brief A reference to a class template, function template, template
1655 * template parameter, or class template partial specialization.
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001656 */
1657 CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001658 /**
1659 * \brief A reference to a namespace or namespace alias.
1660 */
1661 CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46,
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001662 /**
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001663 * \brief A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in
1664 * some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer.
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001665 */
1666 CXCursor_MemberRef = 47,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001667 /**
1668 * \brief A reference to a labeled statement.
1669 *
1670 * This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the
1671 * goto statement in the following example:
1672 *
1673 * \code
1674 * start_over:
1675 * ++counter;
1676 *
1677 * goto start_over;
1678 * \endcode
1679 *
1680 * A label reference cursor refers to a label statement.
1681 */
1682 CXCursor_LabelRef = 48,
1683
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00001684 /**
1685 * \brief A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates
1686 * that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template.
1687 *
1688 * An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where
1689 * a dependent name refers to a function. For example:
1690 *
1691 * \code
1692 * template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&);
1693 *
1694 * struct X { ... };
1695 * void swap(X&, X&);
1696 *
1697 * template<typename T>
1698 * void reverse(T* first, T* last) {
1699 * while (first < last - 1) {
1700 * swap(*first, *--last);
1701 * ++first;
1702 * }
1703 * }
1704 *
1705 * struct Y { };
1706 * void swap(Y&, Y&);
1707 * \endcode
1708 *
1709 * Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration
1710 * reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two
1711 * "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At
1712 * instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via
1713 * argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the
1714 * example).
1715 *
1716 * The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and
1717 * \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions
1718 * referenced by this cursor.
1719 */
1720 CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49,
1721
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001722 /**
1723 * \brief A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression
1724 * context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list.
1725 */
1726 CXCursor_VariableRef = 50,
1727
1728 CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001729
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001730 /* Error conditions */
1731 CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70,
1732 CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70,
1733 CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71,
1734 CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72,
Ted Kremeneke184ac52010-03-19 20:39:03 +00001735 CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73,
1736 CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001737
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001738 /* Expressions */
1739 CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001740
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001741 /**
1742 * \brief An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001743 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001744 *
1745 * Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind
1746 * of expression; one can extract their location information,
1747 * spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the
1748 * expression is not reported.
1749 */
1750 CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001751
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001752 /**
1753 * \brief An expression that refers to some value declaration, such
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00001754 * as a function, variable, or enumerator.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001755 */
1756 CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001757
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001758 /**
1759 * \brief An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union,
1760 * class, Objective-C class, etc.
1761 */
1762 CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001763
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001764 /** \brief An expression that calls a function. */
1765 CXCursor_CallExpr = 103,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001766
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001767 /** \brief An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C
1768 object or class. */
1769 CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104,
Ted Kremenek33b9a422010-04-11 21:47:37 +00001770
1771 /** \brief An expression that represents a block literal. */
1772 CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105,
1773
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001774 /** \brief An integer literal.
1775 */
1776 CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106,
1777
1778 /** \brief A floating point number literal.
1779 */
1780 CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107,
1781
1782 /** \brief An imaginary number literal.
1783 */
1784 CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108,
1785
1786 /** \brief A string literal.
1787 */
1788 CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109,
1789
1790 /** \brief A character literal.
1791 */
1792 CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110,
1793
1794 /** \brief A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)".
1795 *
1796 * This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested.
1797 */
1798 CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111,
1799
1800 /** \brief This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and
1801 * alignof).
1802 */
1803 CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112,
1804
1805 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting.
1806 */
1807 CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113,
1808
1809 /** \brief A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or
1810 * "x <= y".
1811 */
1812 CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114,
1813
1814 /** \brief Compound assignment such as "+=".
1815 */
1816 CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115,
1817
1818 /** \brief The ?: ternary operator.
1819 */
1820 CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116,
1821
1822 /** \brief An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++
1823 * (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr.
1824 *
1825 * For example: (int)f.
1826 */
1827 CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117,
1828
1829 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.5]
1830 */
1831 CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118,
1832
1833 /** \brief Describes an C or C++ initializer list.
1834 */
1835 CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119,
1836
1837 /** \brief The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label.
1838 */
1839 CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120,
1840
1841 /** \brief This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;})
1842 */
1843 CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121,
1844
Benjamin Kramere56f3932011-12-23 17:00:35 +00001845 /** \brief Represents a C11 generic selection.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001846 */
1847 CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122,
1848
1849 /** \brief Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null
1850 * pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same
1851 * size and alignment as a pointer.
1852 *
1853 * The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define
1854 * NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not
1855 * match the size of a pointer).
1856 */
1857 CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123,
1858
1859 /** \brief C++'s static_cast<> expression.
1860 */
1861 CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124,
1862
1863 /** \brief C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression.
1864 */
1865 CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125,
1866
1867 /** \brief C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression.
1868 */
1869 CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126,
1870
1871 /** \brief C++'s const_cast<> expression.
1872 */
1873 CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127,
1874
1875 /** \brief Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional"
1876 * notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]).
1877 *
1878 * Example:
1879 * \code
1880 * x = int(0.5);
1881 * \endcode
1882 */
1883 CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128,
1884
1885 /** \brief A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]).
1886 */
1887 CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129,
1888
1889 /** \brief [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal.
1890 */
1891 CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130,
1892
1893 /** \brief [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal.
1894 */
1895 CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131,
1896
1897 /** \brief Represents the "this" expression in C++
1898 */
1899 CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132,
1900
1901 /** \brief [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression.
1902 *
1903 * This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When
1904 * assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null.
1905 */
1906 CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133,
1907
1908 /** \brief A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g:
1909 * "new CXXNewExpr(foo)".
1910 */
1911 CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134,
1912
1913 /** \brief A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls,
1914 * e.g. "delete[] pArray".
1915 */
1916 CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135,
1917
1918 /** \brief A unary expression.
1919 */
1920 CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136,
1921
Douglas Gregor910c37c2011-11-11 22:35:18 +00001922 /** \brief An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo".
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001923 */
1924 CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137,
1925
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001926 /** \brief An Objective-C \@encode expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001927 */
1928 CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138,
1929
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001930 /** \brief An Objective-C \@selector expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001931 */
1932 CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139,
1933
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001934 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001935 */
1936 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140,
1937
1938 /** \brief An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between
1939 * Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process.
1940 *
1941 * \code
1942 * NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString();
1943 * \endcode
1944 */
1945 CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141,
1946
1947 /** \brief Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of
1948 * expressions.
1949 *
1950 * A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an
1951 * expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example:
1952 *
1953 * \code
1954 * template<typename F, typename ...Types>
1955 * void forward(F f, Types &&...args) {
1956 * f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...);
1957 * }
1958 * \endcode
1959 */
1960 CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142,
1961
1962 /** \brief Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter
1963 * pack.
1964 *
1965 * \code
1966 * template<typename ...Types>
1967 * struct count {
1968 * static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types);
1969 * };
1970 * \endcode
1971 */
1972 CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143,
1973
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001974 /* \brief Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function
1975 * object.
1976 *
1977 * \code
1978 * void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) {
1979 * std::sort(x, x + N,
1980 * [](float a, float b) {
1981 * return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b);
1982 * });
1983 * }
1984 * \endcode
1985 */
1986 CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144,
1987
Ted Kremenek77006f62012-03-06 20:06:06 +00001988 /** \brief Objective-c Boolean Literal.
1989 */
1990 CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145,
1991
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00001992 /** \brief Represents the "self" expression in an Objective-C method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisc2233be2013-04-23 17:57:17 +00001993 */
1994 CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146,
1995
Alexey Bataev1a3320e2015-08-25 14:24:04 +00001996 /** \brief OpenMP 4.0 [2.4, Array Section].
1997 */
1998 CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr = 147,
1999
2000 CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002001
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002002 /* Statements */
2003 CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200,
2004 /**
2005 * \brief A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2006 * interface.
2007 *
2008 * Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of
2009 * statement; one can extract their location information, spelling,
2010 * children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not
2011 * reported.
2012 */
2013 CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00002014
2015 /** \brief A labelled statement in a function.
2016 *
2017 * This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in
2018 * the following example:
2019 *
2020 * \code
2021 * start_over:
2022 * ++counter;
2023 * \endcode
2024 *
2025 */
2026 CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002027
2028 /** \brief A group of statements like { stmt stmt }.
2029 *
2030 * This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function
2031 * bodies.
2032 */
2033 CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202,
2034
Benjamin Kramer2501f142013-10-20 11:47:15 +00002035 /** \brief A case statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002036 */
2037 CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203,
2038
2039 /** \brief A default statement.
2040 */
2041 CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204,
2042
2043 /** \brief An if statement
2044 */
2045 CXCursor_IfStmt = 205,
2046
2047 /** \brief A switch statement.
2048 */
2049 CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206,
2050
2051 /** \brief A while statement.
2052 */
2053 CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207,
2054
2055 /** \brief A do statement.
2056 */
2057 CXCursor_DoStmt = 208,
2058
2059 /** \brief A for statement.
2060 */
2061 CXCursor_ForStmt = 209,
2062
2063 /** \brief A goto statement.
2064 */
2065 CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210,
2066
2067 /** \brief An indirect goto statement.
2068 */
2069 CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211,
2070
2071 /** \brief A continue statement.
2072 */
2073 CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212,
2074
2075 /** \brief A break statement.
2076 */
2077 CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213,
2078
2079 /** \brief A return statement.
2080 */
2081 CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214,
2082
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002083 /** \brief A GCC inline assembly statement extension.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002084 */
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002085 CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5eae0732012-09-24 19:27:20 +00002086 CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002087
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002088 /** \brief Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002089 */
2090 CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216,
2091
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002092 /** \brief Objective-C's \@catch statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002093 */
2094 CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217,
2095
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002096 /** \brief Objective-C's \@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002097 */
2098 CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218,
2099
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002100 /** \brief Objective-C's \@throw statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002101 */
2102 CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219,
2103
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002104 /** \brief Objective-C's \@synchronized statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002105 */
2106 CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220,
2107
2108 /** \brief Objective-C's autorelease pool statement.
2109 */
2110 CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221,
2111
2112 /** \brief Objective-C's collection statement.
2113 */
2114 CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222,
2115
2116 /** \brief C++'s catch statement.
2117 */
2118 CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223,
2119
2120 /** \brief C++'s try statement.
2121 */
2122 CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224,
2123
2124 /** \brief C++'s for (* : *) statement.
2125 */
2126 CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225,
2127
2128 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement.
2129 */
2130 CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226,
2131
2132 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement.
2133 */
2134 CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227,
2135
2136 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement.
2137 */
2138 CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228,
2139
Chad Rosier32503022012-06-11 20:47:18 +00002140 /** \brief A MS inline assembly statement extension.
2141 */
2142 CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229,
2143
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002144 /** \brief The null statement ";": C99 6.8.3p3.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002145 *
2146 * This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement.
2147 */
2148 CXCursor_NullStmt = 230,
2149
2150 /** \brief Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and
2151 * expressions.
2152 */
2153 CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231,
2154
Alexey Bataev5ec3eb12013-07-19 03:13:43 +00002155 /** \brief OpenMP parallel directive.
2156 */
2157 CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232,
2158
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002159 /** \brief OpenMP SIMD directive.
Alexey Bataev1b59ab52014-02-27 08:29:12 +00002160 */
2161 CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233,
2162
Alexey Bataevf29276e2014-06-18 04:14:57 +00002163 /** \brief OpenMP for directive.
2164 */
2165 CXCursor_OMPForDirective = 234,
2166
Alexey Bataevd3f8dd22014-06-25 11:44:49 +00002167 /** \brief OpenMP sections directive.
2168 */
2169 CXCursor_OMPSectionsDirective = 235,
2170
Alexey Bataev1e0498a2014-06-26 08:21:58 +00002171 /** \brief OpenMP section directive.
2172 */
2173 CXCursor_OMPSectionDirective = 236,
2174
Alexey Bataevd1e40fb2014-06-26 12:05:45 +00002175 /** \brief OpenMP single directive.
2176 */
2177 CXCursor_OMPSingleDirective = 237,
2178
Alexey Bataev4acb8592014-07-07 13:01:15 +00002179 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for directive.
2180 */
2181 CXCursor_OMPParallelForDirective = 238,
2182
Alexey Bataev84d0b3e2014-07-08 08:12:03 +00002183 /** \brief OpenMP parallel sections directive.
2184 */
2185 CXCursor_OMPParallelSectionsDirective = 239,
2186
Alexey Bataev9c2e8ee2014-07-11 11:25:16 +00002187 /** \brief OpenMP task directive.
2188 */
2189 CXCursor_OMPTaskDirective = 240,
2190
Alexander Musman80c22892014-07-17 08:54:58 +00002191 /** \brief OpenMP master directive.
2192 */
2193 CXCursor_OMPMasterDirective = 241,
2194
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002195 /** \brief OpenMP critical directive.
2196 */
2197 CXCursor_OMPCriticalDirective = 242,
2198
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002199 /** \brief OpenMP taskyield directive.
2200 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002201 CXCursor_OMPTaskyieldDirective = 243,
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002202
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002203 /** \brief OpenMP barrier directive.
2204 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002205 CXCursor_OMPBarrierDirective = 244,
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002206
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002207 /** \brief OpenMP taskwait directive.
2208 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002209 CXCursor_OMPTaskwaitDirective = 245,
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002210
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002211 /** \brief OpenMP flush directive.
2212 */
2213 CXCursor_OMPFlushDirective = 246,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002214
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002215 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's leave statement.
2216 */
2217 CXCursor_SEHLeaveStmt = 247,
2218
Alexey Bataev9fb6e642014-07-22 06:45:04 +00002219 /** \brief OpenMP ordered directive.
2220 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002221 CXCursor_OMPOrderedDirective = 248,
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002222
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002223 /** \brief OpenMP atomic directive.
2224 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002225 CXCursor_OMPAtomicDirective = 249,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002226
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002227 /** \brief OpenMP for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmanf82886e2014-09-18 05:12:34 +00002228 */
2229 CXCursor_OMPForSimdDirective = 250,
2230
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002231 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002232 */
2233 CXCursor_OMPParallelForSimdDirective = 251,
2234
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002235 /** \brief OpenMP target directive.
2236 */
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002237 CXCursor_OMPTargetDirective = 252,
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002238
Alexey Bataev13314bf2014-10-09 04:18:56 +00002239 /** \brief OpenMP teams directive.
2240 */
2241 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDirective = 253,
2242
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002243 /** \brief OpenMP taskgroup directive.
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002244 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002245 CXCursor_OMPTaskgroupDirective = 254,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002246
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002247 /** \brief OpenMP cancellation point directive.
2248 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002249 CXCursor_OMPCancellationPointDirective = 255,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002250
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002251 /** \brief OpenMP cancel directive.
2252 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002253 CXCursor_OMPCancelDirective = 256,
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002254
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002255 /** \brief OpenMP target data directive.
2256 */
2257 CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective = 257,
2258
Alexey Bataev49f6e782015-12-01 04:18:41 +00002259 /** \brief OpenMP taskloop directive.
2260 */
2261 CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopDirective = 258,
2262
Alexey Bataev0a6ed842015-12-03 09:40:15 +00002263 /** \brief OpenMP taskloop simd directive.
2264 */
2265 CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopSimdDirective = 259,
2266
2267 CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopSimdDirective,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002268
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002269 /**
2270 * \brief Cursor that represents the translation unit itself.
2271 *
2272 * The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root
2273 * cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit.
2274 */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002275 CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 300,
2276
Bill Wendling44426052012-12-20 19:22:21 +00002277 /* Attributes */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002278 CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400,
2279 /**
2280 * \brief An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2281 * interface.
2282 */
2283 CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400,
2284
2285 CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401,
2286 CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402,
Ted Kremenek26bde772010-05-19 17:38:06 +00002287 CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2cb4e3c2011-09-13 17:39:31 +00002288 CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404,
2289 CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405,
Erik Verbruggenca98f2a2011-10-13 09:41:32 +00002290 CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002291 CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis16834f12013-09-25 00:14:38 +00002292 CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408,
Joey Gouly81228382014-05-01 15:41:58 +00002293 CXCursor_PureAttr = 409,
2294 CXCursor_ConstAttr = 410,
2295 CXCursor_NoDuplicateAttr = 411,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002296 CXCursor_CUDAConstantAttr = 412,
2297 CXCursor_CUDADeviceAttr = 413,
2298 CXCursor_CUDAGlobalAttr = 414,
2299 CXCursor_CUDAHostAttr = 415,
Eli Bendersky9b071472014-08-08 14:59:00 +00002300 CXCursor_CUDASharedAttr = 416,
Saleem Abdulrasool79c69712015-09-05 18:53:43 +00002301 CXCursor_VisibilityAttr = 417,
2302 CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_VisibilityAttr,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002303
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002304 /* Preprocessing */
2305 CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500,
Douglas Gregor06d6d322010-03-18 18:04:21 +00002306 CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501,
Chandler Carruth9e4704a2011-07-14 08:41:15 +00002307 CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502,
2308 CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion,
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002309 CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503,
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002310 CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002311 CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective,
2312
2313 /* Extra Declarations */
2314 /**
2315 * \brief A module import declaration.
2316 */
2317 CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600,
Sergey Kalinichev8f3b1872015-11-15 13:48:32 +00002318 CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl = 601,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002319 CXCursor_FirstExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl,
Sergey Kalinichev8f3b1872015-11-15 13:48:32 +00002320 CXCursor_LastExtraDecl = CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl,
Francisco Lopes da Silva975a9f62015-01-21 16:24:11 +00002321
2322 /**
2323 * \brief A code completion overload candidate.
2324 */
2325 CXCursor_OverloadCandidate = 700
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002326};
2327
2328/**
2329 * \brief A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for
2330 * a translation unit.
2331 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002332 * The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002333 * program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations,
2334 * etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations.
2335 * Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in
2336 * a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a
2337 * cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor.
2338 *
2339 * Cursors can be produced in two specific ways.
2340 * clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit,
2341 * from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the
2342 * translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location
2343 * to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the
2344 * source code into the AST.
2345 */
2346typedef struct {
2347 enum CXCursorKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00002348 int xdata;
Dmitri Gribenkoba2f7462013-01-11 21:01:49 +00002349 const void *data[3];
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002350} CXCursor;
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002351
2352/**
2353 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations
2354 *
2355 * @{
2356 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002357
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002358/**
2359 * \brief Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity.
2360 */
2361CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002362
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002363/**
2364 * \brief Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit.
2365 *
2366 * The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the
2367 * various declarations within the given translation unit.
2368 */
2369CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit);
2370
2371/**
2372 * \brief Determine whether two cursors are equivalent.
2373 */
2374CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002375
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002376/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002377 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002378 */
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002379CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002380
2381/**
Douglas Gregor06a3f302010-11-20 00:09:34 +00002382 * \brief Compute a hash value for the given cursor.
2383 */
2384CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor);
2385
2386/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002387 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the given cursor.
2388 */
2389CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor);
2390
2391/**
2392 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration.
2393 */
2394CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind);
2395
2396/**
2397 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple
2398 * reference.
2399 *
2400 * Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to
2401 * other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a
2402 * particular cursor refers to another entity.
2403 */
2404CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind);
2405
2406/**
2407 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression.
2408 */
2409CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind);
2410
2411/**
2412 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement.
2413 */
2414CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind);
2415
2416/**
Douglas Gregora98034a2011-07-06 03:00:34 +00002417 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute.
2418 */
2419CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind);
2420
2421/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002422 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002423 * cursor.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002424 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002425CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind);
2426
2427/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002428 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation
2429 * unit.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002430 */
2431CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002432
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002433/***
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002434 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing
2435 * element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation.
2436 */
2437CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind);
2438
2439/***
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002440 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently
2441 * unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt).
2442 */
2443CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind);
2444
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002445/**
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002446 * \brief Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2447 */
2448enum CXLinkageKind {
2449 /** \brief This value indicates that no linkage information is available
2450 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2451 CXLinkage_Invalid,
2452 /**
2453 * \brief This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that
2454 * have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables.
2455 */
2456 CXLinkage_NoLinkage,
2457 /** \brief This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */
2458 CXLinkage_Internal,
2459 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live
2460 * in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/
2461 CXLinkage_UniqueExternal,
2462 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */
2463 CXLinkage_External
2464};
2465
2466/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002467 * \brief Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002468 */
2469CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor);
2470
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002471enum CXVisibilityKind {
2472 /** \brief This value indicates that no visibility information is available
2473 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2474 CXVisibility_Invalid,
2475
2476 /** \brief Symbol not seen by the linker. */
2477 CXVisibility_Hidden,
2478 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker but resolves to a symbol inside this object. */
2479 CXVisibility_Protected,
2480 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker and acts like a normal symbol. */
Chad Rosierc6bb4242015-11-23 21:05:04 +00002481 CXVisibility_Default
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002482};
2483
NAKAMURA Takumia70cdf52015-11-23 22:51:26 +00002484/**
2485 * \brief Describe the visibility of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2486 *
2487 * This returns the default visibility if not explicitly specified by
2488 * a visibility attribute. The default visibility may be changed by
2489 * commandline arguments.
2490 *
2491 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2492 *
2493 * \returns The visibility of the cursor.
2494 */
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002495CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXVisibilityKind clang_getCursorVisibility(CXCursor cursor);
2496
2497/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002498 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to,
2499 * taking the current target platform into account.
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00002500 *
2501 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2502 *
2503 * \returns The availability of the cursor.
2504 */
2505CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
2506clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor);
2507
2508/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002509 * Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g.,
2510 * a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer.
2511 */
2512typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability {
2513 /**
2514 * \brief A string that describes the platform for which this structure
2515 * provides availability information.
2516 *
2517 * Possible values are "ios" or "macosx".
2518 */
2519 CXString Platform;
2520 /**
2521 * \brief The version number in which this entity was introduced.
2522 */
2523 CXVersion Introduced;
2524 /**
2525 * \brief The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is
2526 * still available).
2527 */
2528 CXVersion Deprecated;
2529 /**
2530 * \brief The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore
2531 * is no longer available.
2532 */
2533 CXVersion Obsoleted;
2534 /**
2535 * \brief Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform.
2536 */
2537 int Unavailable;
2538 /**
2539 * \brief An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to
2540 * suggest replacement APIs.
2541 */
2542 CXString Message;
2543} CXPlatformAvailability;
2544
2545/**
2546 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to
2547 * on any platforms for which availability information is known.
2548 *
2549 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2550 *
2551 * \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
2552 * entity is deprecated on all platforms.
2553 *
2554 * \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2555 * provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client
2556 * is responsible for deallocating this string.
2557 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002558 * \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002559 * entity is unavailable on all platforms.
2560 *
2561 * \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2562 * provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The
2563 * client is responsible for deallocating this string.
2564 *
2565 * \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances
2566 * that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either
2567 * the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as
2568 * returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller.
2569 *
2570 * \param availability_size The number of elements available in the
2571 * \c availability array.
2572 *
2573 * \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is
2574 * available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size).
2575 *
2576 * Note that the client is responsible for calling
2577 * \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the
2578 * platform-availability structures returned. There are
2579 * \c min(N, availability_size) such structures.
2580 */
2581CINDEX_LINKAGE int
2582clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability(CXCursor cursor,
2583 int *always_deprecated,
2584 CXString *deprecated_message,
2585 int *always_unavailable,
2586 CXString *unavailable_message,
2587 CXPlatformAvailability *availability,
2588 int availability_size);
2589
2590/**
2591 * \brief Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure.
2592 */
2593CINDEX_LINKAGE void
2594clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability);
2595
2596/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002597 * \brief Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2598 */
Reid Kleckner9e3bc722013-12-30 17:48:49 +00002599enum CXLanguageKind {
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002600 CXLanguage_Invalid = 0,
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002601 CXLanguage_C,
2602 CXLanguage_ObjC,
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002603 CXLanguage_CPlusPlus
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002604};
2605
2606/**
2607 * \brief Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
2608 */
2609CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor);
2610
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002611/**
2612 * \brief Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from.
2613 */
2614CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor);
2615
Ted Kremenekc0b98662013-04-24 07:17:12 +00002616
2617/**
2618 * \brief A fast container representing a set of CXCursors.
2619 */
2620typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet;
2621
2622/**
2623 * \brief Creates an empty CXCursorSet.
2624 */
2625CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void);
2626
2627/**
2628 * \brief Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory.
2629 */
2630CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset);
2631
2632/**
2633 * \brief Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor.
2634 *
2635 * \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor.
2636*/
2637CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset,
2638 CXCursor cursor);
2639
2640/**
2641 * \brief Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet.
2642 *
2643 * \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise.
2644*/
2645CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset,
2646 CXCursor cursor);
2647
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002648/**
2649 * \brief Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor.
2650 *
2651 * The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains
2652 * the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2653 * are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by
2654 * \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2655 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2656 *
2657 * \code
2658 * class C {
2659 * void f();
2660 * };
2661 *
2662 * void C::f() { }
2663 * \endcode
2664 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002665 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002666 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2667 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002668 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002669 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2670 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2671 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2672 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2673 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2674 *
2675 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2676 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2677 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002678 *
2679 * For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002680 */
2681CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor);
2682
2683/**
2684 * \brief Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor.
2685 *
2686 * The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor
2687 * was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2688 * are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by
2689 * \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2690 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2691 *
2692 * \code
2693 * class C {
2694 * void f();
2695 * };
2696 *
2697 * void C::f() { }
2698 * \endcode
2699 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002700 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002701 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2702 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002703 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002704 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2705 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2706 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2707 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2708 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2709 *
2710 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2711 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2712 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002713 *
2714 * For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is
2715 * the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002716 */
2717CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor);
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002718
2719/**
2720 * \brief Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given
2721 * method.
2722 *
2723 * In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function,
2724 * in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For
2725 * Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's
Argyrios Kyrtzidisbfb24252012-03-08 00:20:03 +00002726 * base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same
2727 * selector and is of the same kind (class or instance).
2728 * If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass,
2729 * its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C
2730 * implementation is considered to override the same methods as its
2731 * corresponding method in the interface.
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002732 *
2733 * For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member
2734 * function with the same signature that occurs in its base
2735 * classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can
2736 * override several virtual member functions coming from different
2737 * base classes.
2738 *
2739 * In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden
2740 * method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if
2741 * a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B
2742 * (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B),
2743 * then the only overridden method returned from this function when
2744 * invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then
2745 * invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden
2746 * methods, to map out the complete method-override set.
2747 *
2748 * \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++
2749 * method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this
2750 * method overrides.
2751 *
2752 * \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a
2753 * pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden
2754 * methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be
2755 * set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to
2756 * \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors().
2757 *
2758 * \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden
2759 * functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the
2760 * array pointed to by \p overridden.
2761 */
2762CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor,
2763 CXCursor **overridden,
2764 unsigned *num_overridden);
2765
2766/**
2767 * \brief Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c
2768 * clang_getOverriddenCursors().
2769 */
2770CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden);
2771
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002772/**
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002773 * \brief Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive
2774 * cursor.
2775 */
2776CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor);
2777
2778/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002779 * @}
2780 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002781
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002782/**
2783 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code
2784 *
2785 * Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These
2786 * routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the
2787 * described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in
2788 * both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back.
2789 *
2790 * @{
Steve Naroffa1c72842009-08-28 15:28:48 +00002791 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002792
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002793/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002794 * \brief Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that
2795 * location in the source code.
2796 *
2797 * clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation
2798 * unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002799 * location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002800 * clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002801 * cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002802 * "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor()
2803 * will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression.
2804 *
2805 * \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or
2806 * a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found.
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002807 */
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002808CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002809
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002810/**
2811 * \brief Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced
2812 * by the given cursor.
2813 *
2814 * The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002815 * declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is
2816 * unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration.
2817 * The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002818 * source code.
2819 */
2820CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002821
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00002822/**
2823 * \brief Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002824 * the given cursor.
2825 *
2826 * The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the
2827 * first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002828 * ends with the last character within that source construct. For a
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002829 * declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference,
2830 * the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced
2831 * entity was actually used).
2832 */
2833CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00002834
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002835/**
2836 * @}
2837 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00002838
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002839/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002840 * \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors
2841 *
2842 * @{
2843 */
2844
2845/**
2846 * \brief Describes the kind of type
2847 */
2848enum CXTypeKind {
2849 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002850 * \brief Represents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available).
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002851 */
2852 CXType_Invalid = 0,
2853
2854 /**
2855 * \brief A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2856 * interface.
2857 */
2858 CXType_Unexposed = 1,
2859
2860 /* Builtin types */
2861 CXType_Void = 2,
2862 CXType_Bool = 3,
2863 CXType_Char_U = 4,
2864 CXType_UChar = 5,
2865 CXType_Char16 = 6,
2866 CXType_Char32 = 7,
2867 CXType_UShort = 8,
2868 CXType_UInt = 9,
2869 CXType_ULong = 10,
2870 CXType_ULongLong = 11,
2871 CXType_UInt128 = 12,
2872 CXType_Char_S = 13,
2873 CXType_SChar = 14,
2874 CXType_WChar = 15,
2875 CXType_Short = 16,
2876 CXType_Int = 17,
2877 CXType_Long = 18,
2878 CXType_LongLong = 19,
2879 CXType_Int128 = 20,
2880 CXType_Float = 21,
2881 CXType_Double = 22,
2882 CXType_LongDouble = 23,
2883 CXType_NullPtr = 24,
2884 CXType_Overload = 25,
2885 CXType_Dependent = 26,
2886 CXType_ObjCId = 27,
2887 CXType_ObjCClass = 28,
2888 CXType_ObjCSel = 29,
2889 CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void,
2890 CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_ObjCSel,
2891
2892 CXType_Complex = 100,
2893 CXType_Pointer = 101,
2894 CXType_BlockPointer = 102,
2895 CXType_LValueReference = 103,
2896 CXType_RValueReference = 104,
2897 CXType_Record = 105,
2898 CXType_Enum = 106,
2899 CXType_Typedef = 107,
2900 CXType_ObjCInterface = 108,
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00002901 CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109,
2902 CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00002903 CXType_FunctionProto = 111,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002904 CXType_ConstantArray = 112,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0661a712013-07-23 17:36:21 +00002905 CXType_Vector = 113,
2906 CXType_IncompleteArray = 114,
2907 CXType_VariableArray = 115,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00002908 CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116,
Sergey Kalinichevc0151202015-11-15 13:10:10 +00002909 CXType_MemberPointer = 117,
2910 CXType_Auto = 118
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002911};
2912
2913/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002914 * \brief Describes the calling convention of a function type
2915 */
2916enum CXCallingConv {
2917 CXCallingConv_Default = 0,
2918 CXCallingConv_C = 1,
2919 CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2,
2920 CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3,
2921 CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4,
2922 CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5,
2923 CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6,
2924 CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7,
Derek Schuff3970a7e2015-01-28 20:24:52 +00002925 /* Value 8 was PnaclCall, but it was never used, so it could safely be re-used. */
Guy Benyeif0a014b2012-12-25 08:53:55 +00002926 CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9,
Charles Davisb5a214e2013-08-30 04:39:01 +00002927 CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = 10,
2928 CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11,
Reid Klecknerd7857f02014-10-24 17:42:17 +00002929 CXCallingConv_X86VectorCall = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002930
2931 CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100,
2932 CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200
2933};
2934
2935
2936/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002937 * \brief The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree.
2938 *
2939 */
2940typedef struct {
2941 enum CXTypeKind kind;
2942 void *data[2];
2943} CXType;
2944
2945/**
2946 * \brief Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any).
2947 */
2948CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C);
2949
2950/**
Dmitri Gribenko00353722013-02-15 21:15:49 +00002951 * \brief Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the
2952 * language of the translation unit from which it came.
2953 *
2954 * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned.
2955 */
2956CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT);
2957
2958/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002959 * \brief Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration.
2960 *
2961 * If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is
2962 * returned.
2963 */
2964CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C);
2965
2966/**
2967 * \brief Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration.
2968 *
2969 * If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is
2970 * returned.
2971 */
2972CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C);
2973
2974/**
2975 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed
2976 * long long.
2977 *
2978 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is returned.
2979 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
2980 * must be verified before calling this function.
2981 */
2982CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C);
2983
2984/**
2985 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned
2986 * long long.
2987 *
2988 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is returned.
2989 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
2990 * must be verified before calling this function.
2991 */
2992CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C);
2993
2994/**
Dmitri Gribenkob506ba12012-12-04 15:13:46 +00002995 * \brief Retrieve the bit width of a bit field declaration as an integer.
2996 *
2997 * If a cursor that is not a bit field declaration is passed in, -1 is returned.
2998 */
2999CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C);
3000
3001/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003002 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given
3003 * cursor.
3004 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003005 * The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for
3006 * declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003007 */
3008CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C);
3009
3010/**
3011 * \brief Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method.
3012 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003013 * The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations
3014 * of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an
3015 * invalid cursor is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003016 */
3017CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i);
3018
3019/**
Eli Benderskyc27a0c42014-10-10 20:01:05 +00003020 * \brief Describes the kind of a template argument.
3021 *
3022 * See the definition of llvm::clang::TemplateArgument::ArgKind for full
3023 * element descriptions.
3024 */
3025enum CXTemplateArgumentKind {
3026 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Null,
3027 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Type,
3028 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Declaration,
3029 CXTemplateArgumentKind_NullPtr,
3030 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Integral,
3031 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Template,
3032 CXTemplateArgumentKind_TemplateExpansion,
3033 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Expression,
3034 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Pack,
3035 /* Indicates an error case, preventing the kind from being deduced. */
3036 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Invalid
3037};
3038
3039/**
3040 *\brief Returns the number of template args of a function decl representing a
3041 * template specialization.
3042 *
3043 * If the argument cursor cannot be converted into a template function
3044 * declaration, -1 is returned.
3045 *
3046 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3047 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3048 * void foo() { ... }
3049 *
3050 * template <>
3051 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3052 *
3053 * The value 3 would be returned from this call.
3054 */
3055CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumTemplateArguments(CXCursor C);
3056
3057/**
3058 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the I'th template argument of the CXCursor C.
3059 *
3060 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, an invalid
3061 * template argument kind is returned.
3062 *
3063 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3064 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3065 * void foo() { ... }
3066 *
3067 * template <>
3068 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3069 *
3070 * For I = 0, 1, and 2, Type, Integral, and Integral will be returned,
3071 * respectively.
3072 */
3073CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTemplateArgumentKind clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentKind(
3074 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3075
3076/**
3077 * \brief Retrieve a CXType representing the type of a TemplateArgument of a
3078 * function decl representing a template specialization.
3079 *
3080 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl whose I'th
3081 * template argument has a kind of CXTemplateArgKind_Integral, an invalid type
3082 * is returned.
3083 *
3084 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3085 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3086 * void foo() { ... }
3087 *
3088 * template <>
3089 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3090 *
3091 * If called with I = 0, "float", will be returned.
3092 * Invalid types will be returned for I == 1 or 2.
3093 */
3094CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentType(CXCursor C,
3095 unsigned I);
3096
3097/**
3098 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3099 * decl representing a template specialization) as a signed long long.
3100 *
3101 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3102 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3103 *
3104 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3105 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3106 * void foo() { ... }
3107 *
3108 * template <>
3109 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3110 *
3111 * If called with I = 1 or 2, -7 or true will be returned, respectively.
3112 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3113 */
3114CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentValue(CXCursor C,
3115 unsigned I);
3116
3117/**
3118 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3119 * decl representing a template specialization) as an unsigned long long.
3120 *
3121 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3122 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3123 *
3124 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3125 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3126 * void foo() { ... }
3127 *
3128 * template <>
3129 * void foo<float, 2147483649, true>();
3130 *
3131 * If called with I = 1 or 2, 2147483649 or true will be returned, respectively.
3132 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3133 */
3134CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentUnsignedValue(
3135 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3136
3137/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003138 * \brief Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003139 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003140 * \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and
3141 * zero otherwise.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003142 */
3143CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B);
3144
3145/**
3146 * \brief Return the canonical type for a CXType.
3147 *
3148 * Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways
3149 * a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying
3150 * type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef
3151 * for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'.
3152 */
3153CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T);
3154
3155/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003156 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set,
3157 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a
3158 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003159 */
3160CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T);
3161
3162/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003163 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set,
3164 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at
3165 * a different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003166 */
3167CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T);
3168
3169/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003170 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set,
3171 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a
3172 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003173 */
3174CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T);
3175
3176/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003177 * \brief For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003178 */
3179CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T);
3180
3181/**
3182 * \brief Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type.
3183 */
3184CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T);
3185
David Chisnall50e4eba2010-12-30 14:05:53 +00003186/**
3187 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration.
3188 */
3189CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C);
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003190
3191/**
3192 * \brief Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind.
3193 */
3194CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K);
3195
3196/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003197 * \brief Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type.
3198 *
3199 * If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned.
3200 */
3201CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T);
3202
3203/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003204 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003205 *
3206 * If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00003207 */
3208CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T);
3209
3210/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003211 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003212 * function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003213 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003214 * If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003215 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003216CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003217
3218/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003219 * \brief Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003220 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003221 * If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough
3222 * parameters, an invalid type is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003223 */
3224CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3225
3226/**
3227 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003228 */
3229CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T);
3230
3231/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003232 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003233 *
3234 * This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method.
Ted Kremenekc62ab8d2010-06-21 20:48:56 +00003235 */
3236CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C);
3237
3238/**
Ted Kremenek0c7476a2010-07-30 00:14:11 +00003239 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0
3240 * otherwise.
3241 */
3242CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T);
3243
3244/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003245 * \brief Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type.
3246 *
3247 * If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type,
3248 * an invalid type is returned.
3249 */
3250CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T);
3251
3252/**
3253 * \brief Return the number of elements of an array or vector type.
3254 *
3255 * If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type,
3256 * -1 is returned.
3257 */
3258CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T);
3259
3260/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003261 * \brief Return the element type of an array type.
3262 *
3263 * If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3264 */
3265CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T);
3266
3267/**
Sylvestre Ledru830885c2012-07-23 08:59:39 +00003268 * \brief Return the array size of a constant array.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003269 *
3270 * If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned.
3271 */
3272CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T);
3273
3274/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003275 * \brief List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf,
3276 * \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf and
3277 * \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf.
3278 *
3279 * A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not
3280 * a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof.
3281 */
3282enum CXTypeLayoutError {
3283 /**
3284 * \brief Type is of kind CXType_Invalid.
3285 */
3286 CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1,
3287 /**
3288 * \brief The type is an incomplete Type.
3289 */
3290 CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2,
3291 /**
3292 * \brief The type is a dependent Type.
3293 */
3294 CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3,
3295 /**
3296 * \brief The type is not a constant size type.
3297 */
3298 CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4,
3299 /**
3300 * \brief The Field name is not valid for this record.
3301 */
3302 CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5
3303};
3304
3305/**
3306 * \brief Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof]
3307 * standard.
3308 *
3309 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3310 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3311 * is returned.
3312 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3313 * returned.
3314 * If the type declaration is not a constant size type,
3315 * CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned.
3316 */
3317CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T);
3318
3319/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00003320 * \brief Return the class type of an member pointer type.
3321 *
3322 * If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3323 */
3324CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T);
3325
3326/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003327 * \brief Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard.
3328 *
3329 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3330 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3331 * is returned.
3332 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3333 * returned.
3334 */
3335CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T);
3336
3337/**
3338 * \brief Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits
3339 * as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4]
3340 *
3341 * If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid
3342 * is returned.
3343 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3344 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3345 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3346 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3347 * If the field's name S is not found,
3348 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3349 */
3350CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S);
3351
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00003352/**
3353 * \brief Return the offset of the field represented by the Cursor.
3354 *
3355 * If the cursor is not a field declaration, -1 is returned.
3356 * If the cursor semantic parent is not a record field declaration,
3357 * CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3358 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3359 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3360 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3361 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3362 * If the field's name S is not found,
3363 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3364 */
3365CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getOffsetOfField(CXCursor C);
3366
3367/**
3368 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous record
3369 * declaration.
3370 */
3371CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymous(CXCursor C);
3372
3373
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003374enum CXRefQualifierKind {
3375 /** \brief No ref-qualifier was provided. */
3376 CXRefQualifier_None = 0,
3377 /** \brief An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */
3378 CXRefQualifier_LValue,
3379 /** \brief An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */
3380 CXRefQualifier_RValue
3381};
3382
3383/**
Dmitri Gribenko6ede6ab2014-02-27 16:05:05 +00003384 * \brief Returns the number of template arguments for given class template
3385 * specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a class template specialization.
3386 *
3387 * Variadic argument packs count as only one argument, and can not be inspected
3388 * further.
3389 */
3390CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T);
3391
3392/**
3393 * \brief Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization
3394 * at given index.
3395 *
3396 * This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle
3397 * template template arguments or variadic packs.
3398 */
3399CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3400
3401/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003402 * \brief Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method.
3403 *
3404 * The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types
3405 * or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned.
3406 */
3407CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T);
3408
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003409/**
3410 * \brief Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a
3411 * bitfield.
3412 */
3413CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C);
3414
3415/**
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003416 * \brief Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind
3417 * CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual.
3418 */
3419CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor);
3420
3421/**
3422 * \brief Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a
3423 * cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier.
3424 */
3425enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier {
3426 CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier,
3427 CX_CXXPublic,
3428 CX_CXXProtected,
3429 CX_CXXPrivate
3430};
3431
3432/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003433 * \brief Returns the access control level for the referenced object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6464082013-04-11 17:31:13 +00003434 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003435 * If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within its
3436 * parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base specifier or
3437 * access specifier, the specifier itself is returned.
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003438 */
3439CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor);
3440
3441/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003442 * \brief Represents the storage classes as declared in the source. CX_SC_Invalid
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00003443 * was added for the case that the passed cursor in not a declaration.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003444 */
3445enum CX_StorageClass {
3446 CX_SC_Invalid,
3447 CX_SC_None,
3448 CX_SC_Extern,
3449 CX_SC_Static,
3450 CX_SC_PrivateExtern,
3451 CX_SC_OpenCLWorkGroupLocal,
3452 CX_SC_Auto,
3453 CX_SC_Register
3454};
3455
3456/**
3457 * \brief Returns the storage class for a function or variable declaration.
3458 *
3459 * If the passed in Cursor is not a function or variable declaration,
3460 * CX_SC_Invalid is returned else the storage class.
3461 */
3462CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_StorageClass clang_Cursor_getStorageClass(CXCursor);
3463
3464/**
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00003465 * \brief Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a
3466 * \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3467 *
3468 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3469 *
3470 * \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it
3471 * is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0.
3472 */
3473CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor);
3474
3475/**
3476 * \brief Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced
3477 * by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3478 *
3479 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3480 *
3481 * \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in
3482 * the cursor.
3483 *
3484 * \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given
3485 * \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an
3486 * associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds,
3487 * returns \c clang_getNullCursor();
3488 */
3489CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor,
3490 unsigned index);
3491
3492/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003493 * @}
3494 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003495
3496/**
Ted Kremenek2c2c5f32010-08-27 21:34:51 +00003497 * \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003498 *
3499 * @{
3500 */
3501
3502
3503/**
3504 * \brief For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute,
3505 * this function returns the collection element type.
3506 *
3507 */
3508CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor);
3509
3510/**
3511 * @}
3512 */
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003513
3514/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003515 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors
3516 *
3517 * These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree
3518 * using cursors.
3519 *
3520 * @{
3521 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003522
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003523/**
3524 * \brief Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular
3525 * cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor.
3526 *
3527 * A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each
3528 * \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed.
3529 */
3530enum CXChildVisitResult {
3531 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003532 * \brief Terminates the cursor traversal.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003533 */
3534 CXChildVisit_Break,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003535 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003536 * \brief Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of
3537 * the cursor just visited, without visiting its children.
3538 */
3539 CXChildVisit_Continue,
3540 /**
3541 * \brief Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using
3542 * the same visitor and client data.
3543 */
3544 CXChildVisit_Recurse
3545};
3546
3547/**
3548 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3549 *
3550 * This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by
3551 * clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3552 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor,
3553 * and its third argument is the client data provided to
3554 * clang_visitCursorChildren().
3555 *
3556 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3557 * to direct clang_visitCursorChildren().
3558 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003559typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor,
3560 CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003561 CXClientData client_data);
3562
3563/**
3564 * \brief Visit the children of a particular cursor.
3565 *
3566 * This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor,
3567 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
3568 * visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns
3569 * \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if
3570 * the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3571 *
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003572 * \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of
Daniel Dunbarb9999fd2010-01-24 04:10:31 +00003573 * cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003574 * definition, have no children).
3575 *
3576 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
3577 * child of \p parent.
3578 *
3579 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
3580 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
3581 *
3582 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
3583 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3584 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003585CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003586 CXCursorVisitor visitor,
3587 CXClientData client_data);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003588#ifdef __has_feature
3589# if __has_feature(blocks)
3590/**
3591 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3592 *
3593 * This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by
3594 * clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3595 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor.
3596 *
3597 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3598 * to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock().
3599 */
3600typedef enum CXChildVisitResult
3601 (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor, CXCursor parent);
3602
3603/**
3604 * Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves
3605 * identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects.
3606 */
3607unsigned clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent,
3608 CXCursorVisitorBlock block);
3609# endif
3610#endif
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003611
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003612/**
3613 * @}
3614 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003615
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003616/**
3617 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST
3618 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003619 * These routines provide the ability to determine references within and
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003620 * across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced
3621 * by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference,
3622 * and associate declarations with their definitions.
3623 *
3624 * @{
3625 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003626
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003627/**
3628 * \brief Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced
3629 * by the given cursor.
3630 *
3631 * A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular
3632 * entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be
3633 * compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in
3634 * one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit.
3635 */
3636CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor);
3637
3638/**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003639 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class.
3640 */
3641CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name);
3642
3643/**
3644 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category.
3645 */
3646CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Ted Kremenekbc1a67b2010-03-15 17:38:58 +00003647 clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory(const char *class_name,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003648 const char *category_name);
3649
3650/**
3651 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol.
3652 */
3653CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
3654 clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name);
3655
3656
3657/**
3658 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and
3659 * the USR for its containing class.
3660 */
3661CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name,
3662 CXString classUSR);
3663
3664/**
3665 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and
3666 * the USR for its containing class.
3667 */
3668CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name,
3669 unsigned isInstanceMethod,
3670 CXString classUSR);
3671
3672/**
3673 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR
3674 * for its containing class.
3675 */
3676CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property,
3677 CXString classUSR);
3678
3679/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003680 * \brief Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3681 */
3682CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor);
3683
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003684/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003685 * \brief Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name.
3686 * Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003687 * Objective-C methods and Objective-C message expressions, there are multiple
3688 * pieces for each selector identifier.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003689 *
3690 * \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater
3691 * than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range.
3692 *
3693 * \param options Reserved.
3694 */
3695CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange(CXCursor,
3696 unsigned pieceIndex,
3697 unsigned options);
3698
3699/**
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003700 * \brief Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3701 *
3702 * The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor,
3703 * such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a
3704 * class template specialization.
3705 */
3706CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor);
3707
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003708/** \brief For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the
3709 * entity that it references.
3710 *
3711 * Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an
3712 * Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003713 * This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003714 * cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or
3715 * definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003716 * Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor.
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003717 */
3718CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003719
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003720/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003721 * \brief For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration
3722 * of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of
3723 * that entity.
3724 *
3725 * Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation
3726 * unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a
3727 * definition. For example, given:
3728 *
3729 * \code
3730 * int f(int, int);
3731 * int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); }
3732 * int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; }
3733 * int f(int, int);
3734 * \endcode
3735 *
3736 * there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the
3737 * second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition()
3738 * function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f"
3739 * (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced
3740 * that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a
3741 * declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f"
3742 * declaration).
3743 *
3744 * If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition,
3745 * e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this
3746 * translation unit, returns a NULL cursor.
3747 */
3748CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3749
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003750/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003751 * \brief Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor
3752 * is also a definition of that entity.
3753 */
3754CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3755
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003756/**
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003757 * \brief Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor.
3758 *
3759 * In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several
3760 * times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can
3761 * be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined:
3762 *
3763 * \code
3764 * struct X;
3765 * struct X;
3766 * struct X {
3767 * int member;
3768 * };
3769 * \endcode
3770 *
3771 * The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three
3772 * different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying
3773 * entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which
3774 * is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can
3775 * determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by
3776 * comparing their canonical cursors.
3777 *
3778 * \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor.
3779 */
3780CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor);
3781
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003782
3783/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003784 * \brief If the cursor points to a selector identifier in an Objective-C
3785 * method or message expression, this returns the selector index.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003786 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003787 * After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003788 * determine if the location points to a selector identifier.
3789 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003790 * \returns The selector index if the cursor is an Objective-C method or message
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003791 * expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1
3792 * otherwise.
3793 */
3794CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor);
3795
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003796/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003797 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an Objective-C
3798 * message, returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning:
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003799 *
3800 * For a C++ method: the call is virtual.
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003801 * For an Objective-C message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super'
3802 * or a specific class.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003803 *
3804 * If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a
3805 * method/message, it will return zero.
3806 */
3807CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C);
3808
3809/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003810 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to an Objective-C message, returns the CXType
3811 * of the receiver.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb26a24c2012-11-01 02:01:34 +00003812 */
3813CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C);
3814
3815/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00003816 * \brief Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl.
3817 */
3818typedef enum {
3819 CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00,
3820 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01,
3821 CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02,
3822 CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04,
3823 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08,
3824 CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10,
3825 CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20,
3826 CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40,
3827 CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80,
3828 CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100,
3829 CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200,
3830 CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400,
3831 CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800
3832} CXObjCPropertyAttrKind;
3833
3834/**
3835 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the
3836 * associated property attributes. The bits are formed from
3837 * \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind.
3838 *
3839 * \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0.
3840 */
3841CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C,
3842 unsigned reserved);
3843
3844/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003845 * \brief 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003846 * Objective-C method declarations.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003847 */
3848typedef enum {
3849 CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0,
3850 CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1,
3851 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2,
3852 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4,
3853 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8,
3854 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10,
3855 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20
3856} CXObjCDeclQualifierKind;
3857
3858/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003859 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or parameter
3860 * declaration, return the associated Objective-C qualifiers for the return
3861 * type or the parameter respectively. The bits are formed from
3862 * CXObjCDeclQualifierKind.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003863 */
3864CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C);
3865
3866/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003867 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or property
3868 * declaration, return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "@optional".
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7b50fc52013-07-05 20:44:37 +00003869 * Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "@required".
3870 */
3871CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C);
3872
3873/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis23814e42013-04-18 23:53:05 +00003874 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method.
3875 */
3876CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C);
3877
3878/**
Dmitri Gribenkoaab83832012-06-20 00:34:58 +00003879 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3880 * comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments
3881 * with whitespace in between.
3882 */
3883CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getCommentRange(CXCursor C);
3884
3885/**
3886 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3887 * comment text, including comment markers.
3888 */
3889CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getRawCommentText(CXCursor C);
3890
3891/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003892 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g.,
3893 * declaration), return the associated \\brief paragraph; otherwise return the
3894 * first paragraph.
Dmitri Gribenko5188c4b2012-06-26 20:39:18 +00003895 */
3896CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getBriefCommentText(CXCursor C);
3897
3898/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003899 * @}
3900 */
3901
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00003902/** \defgroup CINDEX_MANGLE Name Mangling API Functions
3903 *
3904 * @{
3905 */
3906
3907/**
3908 * \brief Retrieve the CXString representing the mangled name of the cursor.
3909 */
3910CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getMangling(CXCursor);
3911
3912/**
Saleem Abdulrasool60034432015-11-12 03:57:22 +00003913 * \brief Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the C++
3914 * constructor or destructor at the cursor.
3915 */
3916CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getCXXManglings(CXCursor);
3917
3918/**
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00003919 * @}
3920 */
3921
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003922/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003923 * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection
3924 *
3925 * The functions in this group provide access to information about modules.
3926 *
3927 * @{
3928 */
3929
3930typedef void *CXModule;
3931
3932/**
3933 * \brief Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module.
3934 */
3935CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C);
3936
3937/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6d49c32014-05-14 23:14:37 +00003938 * \brief Given a CXFile header file, return the module that contains it, if one
3939 * exists.
3940 */
3941CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_getModuleForFile(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile);
3942
3943/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003944 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003945 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12fdb9e2013-04-26 22:47:49 +00003946 * \returns the module file where the provided module object came from.
3947 */
3948CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module);
3949
3950/**
3951 * \param Module a module object.
3952 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003953 * \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level,
3954 * e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module.
3955 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003956CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003957
3958/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003959 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003960 *
3961 * \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it
3962 * will return "vector".
3963 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003964CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003965
3966/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003967 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003968 *
3969 * \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector".
3970 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003971CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003972
3973/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003974 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003975 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis884337f2014-05-15 04:44:25 +00003976 * \returns non-zero if the module is a system one.
3977 */
3978CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Module_isSystem(CXModule Module);
3979
3980/**
3981 * \param Module a module object.
3982 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003983 * \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module.
3984 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00003985CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Module_getNumTopLevelHeaders(CXTranslationUnit,
3986 CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003987
3988/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003989 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003990 *
3991 * \param Index top level header index (zero-based).
3992 *
3993 * \returns the specified top level header associated with the module.
3994 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003995CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00003996CXFile clang_Module_getTopLevelHeader(CXTranslationUnit,
3997 CXModule Module, unsigned Index);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003998
3999/**
4000 * @}
4001 */
4002
4003/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004004 * \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection
4005 *
4006 * The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific
4007 * to C++ language features.
4008 *
4009 * @{
4010 */
4011
4012/**
Saleem Abdulrasool6ea75db2015-10-27 15:50:22 +00004013 * \brief Determine if a C++ field is declared 'mutable'.
4014 */
4015CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXField_isMutable(CXCursor C);
4016
4017/**
Dmitri Gribenko62770be2013-05-17 18:38:35 +00004018 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4019 * pure virtual.
4020 */
4021CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C);
4022
4023/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004024 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4025 * declared 'static'.
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004026 */
4027CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C);
4028
4029/**
Douglas Gregor9519d922011-05-12 15:17:24 +00004030 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4031 * explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from
4032 * one of the base classes.
4033 */
4034CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C);
4035
4036/**
Dmitri Gribenkoe570ede2014-04-07 14:59:13 +00004037 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4038 * declared 'const'.
4039 */
4040CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isConst(CXCursor C);
4041
4042/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004043 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a template, determine
4044 * the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating
4045 * the template.
4046 *
4047 * This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template,
4048 * class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the
4049 * cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is
4050 * declared with "struct", "class" or "union".
4051 *
4052 * \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template
4053 * declaration.
4054 *
4055 * \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated
4056 * by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns
4057 * \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound.
4058 */
4059CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C);
4060
4061/**
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004062 * \brief Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation
4063 * of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it
4064 * specializes or from which it was instantiated.
4065 *
4066 * This routine determines the template involved both for explicit
4067 * specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template,
4068 * both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template
4069 * specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return
4070 * either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was
4071 * instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template
4072 * partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a
4073 * function template specialization (including instantiations), this
4074 * this routine will return the specialized template.
4075 *
4076 * For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or
4077 * static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member.
4078 * Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class
4079 * templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that
4080 * templates do, so this routine treats them similarly.
4081 *
4082 * \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member
4083 * of a template.
4084 *
4085 * \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a
4086 * template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or
4087 * from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor.
4088 */
4089CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C);
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004090
4091/**
4092 * \brief Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range
4093 * covering that reference.
4094 *
4095 * \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or
4096 * an operator call.
4097 * \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags:
4098 * CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and
4099 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4100 * \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag
4101 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is
4102 * available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a
Benjamin Kramer474261a2012-06-02 10:20:41 +00004103 * non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004104 * pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4105 *
4106 * \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no
4107 * name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned.
4108 */
Francois Pichetece689f2011-07-25 22:00:44 +00004109CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange(CXCursor C,
4110 unsigned NameFlags,
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004111 unsigned PieceIndex);
4112
4113enum CXNameRefFlags {
4114 /**
4115 * \brief Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the
4116 * range.
4117 */
4118 CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1,
4119
4120 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004121 * \brief Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>,
4122 * in the range.
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004123 */
4124 CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2,
4125
4126 /**
4127 * \brief If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range.
4128 *
4129 * Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more
4130 * parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator:
4131 * \code
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004132 * [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // Objective-C
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004133 * return some_vector[1]; // C++
4134 * \endcode
4135 */
4136 CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4
4137};
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004138
4139/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004140 * @}
4141 */
4142
4143/**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004144 * \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation
4145 *
4146 * The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a
4147 * translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to
4148 * their corresponding cursors.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004149 *
4150 * @{
4151 */
4152
4153/**
4154 * \brief Describes a kind of token.
4155 */
4156typedef enum CXTokenKind {
4157 /**
4158 * \brief A token that contains some kind of punctuation.
4159 */
4160 CXToken_Punctuation,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004161
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004162 /**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004163 * \brief A language keyword.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004164 */
4165 CXToken_Keyword,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004166
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004167 /**
4168 * \brief An identifier (that is not a keyword).
4169 */
4170 CXToken_Identifier,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004171
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004172 /**
4173 * \brief A numeric, string, or character literal.
4174 */
4175 CXToken_Literal,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004176
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004177 /**
4178 * \brief A comment.
4179 */
4180 CXToken_Comment
4181} CXTokenKind;
4182
4183/**
4184 * \brief Describes a single preprocessing token.
4185 */
4186typedef struct {
4187 unsigned int_data[4];
4188 void *ptr_data;
4189} CXToken;
4190
4191/**
4192 * \brief Determine the kind of the given token.
4193 */
4194CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004195
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004196/**
4197 * \brief Determine the spelling of the given token.
4198 *
4199 * The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g.,
4200 * the text of an identifier or keyword.
4201 */
4202CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004203
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004204/**
4205 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given token.
4206 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004207CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004208 CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004209
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004210/**
4211 * \brief Retrieve a source range that covers the given token.
4212 */
4213CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
4214
4215/**
4216 * \brief Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw
4217 * lexical tokens.
4218 *
4219 * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized.
4220 *
4221 * \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the
4222 * tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range,
4223 *
4224 * \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens
4225 * that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be
4226 * freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed.
4227 *
4228 * \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens
4229 * array.
4230 *
4231 */
4232CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range,
4233 CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004234
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004235/**
4236 * \brief Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token
4237 * that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree.
4238 *
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004239 * This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking
4240 * clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the
4241 * tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those
4242 * cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are
4243 * accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x),
4244 * clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors:
4245 *
4246 * * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'.
4247 * * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'.
4248 * * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'.
4249 *
4250 * Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the
4251 * annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function
4252 * and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small
4253 * part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is
4254 * not provided as an annotation.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004255 *
4256 * \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens.
4257 *
4258 * \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate.
4259 *
4260 * \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens.
4261 *
4262 * \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be
4263 * replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token.
4264 */
4265CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4266 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens,
4267 CXCursor *Cursors);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004268
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004269/**
4270 * \brief Free the given set of tokens.
4271 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004272CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004273 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004274
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004275/**
4276 * @}
4277 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004278
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004279/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004280 * \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities
4281 *
4282 * These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not
4283 * be relied upon.
4284 *
4285 * @{
4286 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004287
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004288/* for debug/testing */
Ted Kremenek29004672010-02-17 00:41:32 +00004289CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004290CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent(CXCursor,
4291 const char **startBuf,
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004292 const char **endBuf,
4293 unsigned *startLine,
4294 unsigned *startColumn,
4295 unsigned *endLine,
4296 unsigned *endColumn);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +00004297CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void);
Daniel Dunbar23420652010-11-04 01:26:29 +00004298CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void*), void *user_data,
4299 unsigned stack_size);
4300
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004301/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004302 * @}
4303 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004304
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004305/**
4306 * \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion
4307 *
4308 * Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with
4309 * knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting
4310 * syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to
4311 * use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and
4312 * routines provide support for code completion.
4313 *
4314 * @{
4315 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004316
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004317/**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004318 * \brief A semantic string that describes a code-completion result.
4319 *
4320 * A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion
4321 * result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the
4322 * source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected.
4323 * Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which
4324 * contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g.,
4325 * the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of
4326 * the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace
4327 * with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004328 * description of the different kinds of chunks.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004329 */
4330typedef void *CXCompletionString;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004331
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004332/**
4333 * \brief A single result of code completion.
4334 */
4335typedef struct {
4336 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004337 * \brief The kind of entity that this completion refers to.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004338 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004339 * The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004340 * *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is
4341 * referring to.
4342 *
4343 * \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow
4344 * the client to extract additional information from declaration.
4345 */
4346 enum CXCursorKind CursorKind;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004347
4348 /**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004349 * \brief The code-completion string that describes how to insert this
4350 * code-completion result into the editing buffer.
4351 */
4352 CXCompletionString CompletionString;
4353} CXCompletionResult;
4354
4355/**
4356 * \brief Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string.
4357 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004358 * Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is
4359 * either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004360 * should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string.
4361 */
4362enum CXCompletionChunkKind {
4363 /**
4364 * \brief A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that
4365 * could be a part of the template (but is not required).
4366 *
4367 * The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004368 * string for its representation, which is accessible via
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004369 * \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string
4370 * describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional.
4371 * For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for
4372 * arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given:
4373 *
4374 * \code
4375 * void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828);
4376 * \endcode
4377 *
4378 * The code-completion string for this function would contain:
4379 * - a TypedText chunk for "f".
4380 * - a LeftParen chunk for "(".
4381 * - a Placeholder chunk for "int x"
4382 * - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g.,
4383 * - a Comma chunk for ","
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004384 * - a Placeholder chunk for "float y"
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004385 * - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument:
4386 * - a Comma chunk for ","
4387 * - a Placeholder chunk for "double z"
4388 * - a RightParen chunk for ")"
4389 *
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004390 * There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are:
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004391 * - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4392 * function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x").
4393 * - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4394 * function "f" would have all of the parameters.
4395 */
4396 CXCompletionChunk_Optional,
4397 /**
4398 * \brief Text that a user would be expected to type to get this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004399 * code-completion result.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004400 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004401 * There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which
4402 * will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004403 * declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are
4404 * expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this
4405 * chunk.
4406 */
4407 CXCompletionChunk_TypedText,
4408 /**
4409 * \brief Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result.
4410 *
4411 * A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be
4412 * inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result
4413 * be selected.
4414 */
4415 CXCompletionChunk_Text,
4416 /**
4417 * \brief Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user.
4418 *
4419 * A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text
4420 * into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark
4421 * the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the
4422 * user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual
4423 * text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before
4424 * the user replaces the placeholder with real code.
4425 */
4426 CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder,
4427 /**
4428 * \brief Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as
4429 * part of the template.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004430 *
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004431 * An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to
4432 * help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the
4433 * right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted
4434 * by code completion.
4435 */
4436 CXCompletionChunk_Informative,
4437 /**
4438 * \brief Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is
4439 * referring to function call, message send, or template specialization.
4440 *
4441 * A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing
4442 * information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the
4443 * code-completion point. For example, given a function
4444 *
4445 * \code
4446 * int add(int x, int y);
4447 * \endcode
4448 *
4449 * and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the
4450 * "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk
4451 * for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that
4452 * parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004453 * point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004454 * "current paremeter" chunk to "int y".
4455 */
4456 CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter,
4457 /**
4458 * \brief A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or
4459 * signal the beginning of a function parameter list.
4460 */
4461 CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen,
4462 /**
4463 * \brief A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or
4464 * signal the end of a function parameter list.
4465 */
4466 CXCompletionChunk_RightParen,
4467 /**
4468 * \brief A left bracket ('[').
4469 */
4470 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket,
4471 /**
4472 * \brief A right bracket (']').
4473 */
4474 CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket,
4475 /**
4476 * \brief A left brace ('{').
4477 */
4478 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace,
4479 /**
4480 * \brief A right brace ('}').
4481 */
4482 CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace,
4483 /**
4484 * \brief A left angle bracket ('<').
4485 */
4486 CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle,
4487 /**
4488 * \brief A right angle bracket ('>').
4489 */
4490 CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle,
4491 /**
4492 * \brief A comma separator (',').
4493 */
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004494 CXCompletionChunk_Comma,
4495 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004496 * \brief Text that specifies the result type of a given result.
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004497 *
4498 * This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004499 * the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004500 * expression using the given completion string would have.
4501 */
Douglas Gregor504a6ae2010-01-10 23:08:15 +00004502 CXCompletionChunk_ResultType,
4503 /**
4504 * \brief A colon (':').
4505 */
4506 CXCompletionChunk_Colon,
4507 /**
4508 * \brief A semicolon (';').
4509 */
4510 CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon,
4511 /**
4512 * \brief An '=' sign.
4513 */
4514 CXCompletionChunk_Equal,
4515 /**
4516 * Horizontal space (' ').
4517 */
4518 CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace,
4519 /**
4520 * Vertical space ('\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to
4521 * perform indentation.
4522 */
4523 CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004524};
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004525
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004526/**
4527 * \brief Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string.
4528 *
4529 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4530 *
4531 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4532 *
4533 * \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number.
4534 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004535CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004536clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4537 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004538
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004539/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004540 * \brief Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004541 * completion string.
4542 *
4543 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4544 *
4545 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4546 *
4547 * \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number.
4548 */
Ted Kremenekf602f962010-02-17 01:42:24 +00004549CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004550clang_getCompletionChunkText(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4551 unsigned chunk_number);
4552
4553/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004554 * \brief Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004555 * within a completion string.
4556 *
4557 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4558 *
4559 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4560 *
4561 * \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004562 * \c chunk_number.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004563 */
4564CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4565clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4566 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004567
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004568/**
4569 * \brief Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string.
4570 */
4571CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4572clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4573
4574/**
Douglas Gregora2db7932010-05-26 22:00:08 +00004575 * \brief Determine the priority of this code completion.
4576 *
4577 * The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this
4578 * particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The
4579 * priority is selected by various internal heuristics.
4580 *
4581 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4582 *
4583 * \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate
4584 * higher-priority (more likely) completions.
4585 */
4586CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4587clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4588
4589/**
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004590 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion
4591 * string refers to.
4592 *
4593 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4594 *
4595 * \returns The availability of the completion string.
4596 */
4597CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
4598clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4599
4600/**
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004601 * \brief Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given
4602 * completion string.
4603 *
4604 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4605 *
4606 * \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion
4607 * string.
4608 */
4609CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4610clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4611
4612/**
4613 * \brief Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string.
4614 *
4615 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4616 *
4617 * \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the
4618 * completion string.
4619 *
4620 * \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index
4621 * \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available.
4622 */
4623CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4624clang_getCompletionAnnotation(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4625 unsigned annotation_number);
4626
4627/**
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004628 * \brief Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string.
4629 *
4630 * The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of
4631 * the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example,
4632 * a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class
4633 * or protocol as its context.
4634 *
4635 * \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is
4636 * being queried.
4637 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ae39562012-09-26 16:39:56 +00004638 * \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL.
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004639 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004640 * \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004641 * the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class.
4642 */
4643CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4644clang_getCompletionParent(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4645 enum CXCursorKind *kind);
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004646
4647/**
4648 * \brief Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration
4649 * that corresponds to the given completion string.
4650 */
4651CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4652clang_getCompletionBriefComment(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4653
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004654/**
Douglas Gregor3f35bb22011-08-04 20:04:59 +00004655 * \brief Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro
4656 * definition cursor.
4657 *
4658 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
4659 *
4660 * \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro
4661 * definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors.
4662 */
4663CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4664clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor);
4665
4666/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004667 * \brief Contains the results of code-completion.
4668 *
4669 * This data structure contains the results of code completion, as
Douglas Gregor6a9580282010-10-11 21:51:20 +00004670 * produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004671 * \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults.
4672 */
4673typedef struct {
4674 /**
4675 * \brief The code-completion results.
4676 */
4677 CXCompletionResult *Results;
4678
4679 /**
4680 * \brief The number of code-completion results stored in the
4681 * \c Results array.
4682 */
4683 unsigned NumResults;
4684} CXCodeCompleteResults;
4685
4686/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004687 * \brief Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to
4688 * modify its behavior.
4689 *
4690 * The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to
4691 * provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4692 */
4693enum CXCodeComplete_Flags {
4694 /**
4695 * \brief Whether to include macros within the set of code
4696 * completions returned.
4697 */
4698 CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01,
4699
4700 /**
4701 * \brief Whether to include code patterns for language constructs
4702 * within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops.
4703 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004704 CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02,
4705
4706 /**
4707 * \brief Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code
4708 * completions returned.
4709 */
4710 CXCodeComplete_IncludeBriefComments = 0x04
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004711};
4712
4713/**
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004714 * \brief Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring.
4715 *
4716 * The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple
4717 * contexts are occurring simultaneously.
4718 */
4719enum CXCompletionContext {
4720 /**
4721 * \brief The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results
4722 * should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.)
4723 */
4724 CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0,
4725
4726 /**
4727 * \brief Completions for any possible type should be included in the results.
4728 */
4729 CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0,
4730
4731 /**
4732 * \brief Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.)
4733 * should be included in the results.
4734 */
4735 CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1,
4736 /**
4737 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should
4738 * be included in the results.
4739 */
4740 CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2,
4741 /**
4742 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector
4743 * should be included in the results.
4744 */
4745 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3,
4746 /**
4747 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be
4748 * included in the results.
4749 */
4750 CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4,
4751
4752 /**
4753 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot
4754 * operator should be included in the results.
4755 */
4756 CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5,
4757 /**
4758 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow
4759 * operator should be included in the results.
4760 */
4761 CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6,
4762 /**
4763 * \brief Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed
4764 * using the dot operator should be included in the results.
4765 */
4766 CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7,
4767
4768 /**
4769 * \brief Completions for enum tags should be included in the results.
4770 */
4771 CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8,
4772 /**
4773 * \brief Completions for union tags should be included in the results.
4774 */
4775 CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9,
4776 /**
4777 * \brief Completions for struct tags should be included in the results.
4778 */
4779 CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10,
4780
4781 /**
4782 * \brief Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results.
4783 */
4784 CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11,
4785 /**
4786 * \brief Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be
4787 * included in the results.
4788 */
4789 CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12,
4790 /**
4791 * \brief Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in
4792 * the results.
4793 */
4794 CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13,
4795
4796 /**
4797 * \brief Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included
4798 * in the results.
4799 */
4800 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14,
4801 /**
4802 * \brief Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in
4803 * the results.
4804 */
4805 CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15,
4806 /**
4807 * \brief Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in
4808 * the results.
4809 */
4810 CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16,
4811 /**
4812 * \brief Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included
4813 * in the results.
4814 */
4815 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17,
4816 /**
4817 * \brief Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in
4818 * the results.
4819 */
4820 CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18,
4821 /**
4822 * \brief Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in
4823 * the results.
4824 */
4825 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19,
4826
4827 /**
4828 * \brief Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in
4829 * the results.
4830 */
4831 CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20,
4832
4833 /**
4834 * \brief Natural language completions should be included in the results.
4835 */
4836 CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21,
4837
4838 /**
4839 * \brief The current context is unknown, so set all contexts.
4840 */
4841 CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 22) - 1)
4842};
4843
4844/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004845 * \brief Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be
4846 * passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4847 */
4848CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void);
4849
4850/**
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004851 * \brief Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit.
4852 *
4853 * This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and
4854 * column within source code, providing results that suggest potential
4855 * code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model
4856 * for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file,
4857 * performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has
4858 * been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed
4859 * to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the
4860 * current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of
4861 * semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are
4862 * returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure.
4863 *
4864 * Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the
4865 * user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the
4866 * code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p
4867 * is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then
4868 * after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is afer the ">",
4869 * the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that
4870 * "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the
4871 * beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results
4872 * based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for
4873 * the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after
4874 * the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the
4875 * client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only
4876 * showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface
4877 * is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion
4878 * results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must
4879 * have a lower latency.
4880 *
4881 * \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should
4882 * occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be
4883 * completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may
4884 * be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the
4885 * translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation.
4886 *
4887 * \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code
4888 * completion should be performed. This filename may be any file
4889 * included in the translation unit.
4890 *
4891 * \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur.
4892 *
4893 * \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur.
4894 * Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that
4895 * initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token.
4896 *
4897 * \param unsaved_files the Tiles that have not yet been saved to disk
4898 * but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the
4899 * contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as
4900 * specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the
4901 * client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to
4902 * this function returns.
4903 *
4904 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
4905 * unsaved_files.
4906 *
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004907 * \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code
4908 * completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the
4909 * CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The
4910 * \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set
4911 * of code-completion options.
4912 *
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004913 * \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure
4914 * containing code-completion results, which should eventually be
4915 * freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code
4916 * completion fails, returns NULL.
4917 */
4918CINDEX_LINKAGE
4919CXCodeCompleteResults *clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4920 const char *complete_filename,
4921 unsigned complete_line,
4922 unsigned complete_column,
4923 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004924 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
4925 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004926
4927/**
Douglas Gregor49f67ce2010-08-26 13:48:20 +00004928 * \brief Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical
4929 * order.
4930 *
4931 * \param Results The set of results to sort.
4932 * \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results.
4933 */
4934CINDEX_LINKAGE
4935void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results,
4936 unsigned NumResults);
4937
4938/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004939 * \brief Free the given set of code-completion results.
4940 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004941CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004942void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004943
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00004944/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004945 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the
4946 * location where code completion was performed.
4947 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004948CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004949unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
4950
4951/**
4952 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion.
4953 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004954 * \param Results the code completion results to query.
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004955 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
4956 *
4957 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
4958 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
4959 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004960CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004961CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
4962 unsigned Index);
4963
4964/**
Nico Weberdd9c19f2014-04-24 03:06:18 +00004965 * \brief Determines what completions are appropriate for the context
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004966 * the given code completion.
4967 *
4968 * \param Results the code completion results to query
4969 *
4970 * \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use
4971 * along with the given code completion results.
4972 */
4973CINDEX_LINKAGE
4974unsigned long long clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(
4975 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor63745d52011-07-21 01:05:26 +00004976
4977/**
4978 * \brief Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code
4979 * completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for
4980 * contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C
4981 * message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return
4982 * CXCursor_InvalidCode.
4983 *
4984 * \param Results the code completion results to query
4985 *
4986 * \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete
4987 * information about the container. If Clang does not have complete
4988 * information, this value will be true.
4989 *
4990 * \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a
4991 * container
4992 */
4993CINDEX_LINKAGE
4994enum CXCursorKind clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(
4995 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
4996 unsigned *IsIncomplete);
4997
4998/**
4999 * \brief Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion
5000 * context. If there is not a container for the current context, this
5001 * function will return the empty string.
5002 *
5003 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5004 *
5005 * \returns the USR for the container
5006 */
5007CINDEX_LINKAGE
5008CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005009
Douglas Gregorea777402011-07-26 15:24:30 +00005010
5011/**
5012 * \brief Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message
5013 * send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a
5014 * non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and
5015 * CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage.
5016 *
5017 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5018 *
5019 * \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far
5020 * for an Objective-C message send.
5021 */
5022CINDEX_LINKAGE
5023CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5024
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005025/**
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005026 * @}
5027 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005028
5029
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005030/**
5031 * \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions
5032 *
5033 * @{
5034 */
Ted Kremenek3e315a22010-01-23 17:51:23 +00005035
5036/**
5037 * \brief Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not
5038 * intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable).
5039 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +00005040CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void);
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005041
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005042
5043/**
5044 * \brief Enable/disable crash recovery.
5045 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005046 * \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero
5047 * value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it.
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005048 */
5049CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled);
5050
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005051 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005052 * \brief Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005053 * (used with clang_getInclusions()).
5054 *
5055 * This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005056 * file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005057 * a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and
5058 * the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The
5059 * array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example,
5060 * the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'.
5061 */
5062typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file,
5063 CXSourceLocation* inclusion_stack,
5064 unsigned include_len,
5065 CXClientData client_data);
5066
5067/**
5068 * \brief Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit.
5069 * The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included
5070 * file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one
5071 * is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself).
5072 */
5073CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu,
5074 CXInclusionVisitor visitor,
5075 CXClientData client_data);
5076
5077/**
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005078 * @}
5079 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005080
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005081/** \defgroup CINDEX_REMAPPING Remapping functions
5082 *
5083 * @{
5084 */
5085
5086/**
5087 * \brief A remapping of original source files and their translated files.
5088 */
5089typedef void *CXRemapping;
5090
5091/**
5092 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5093 *
5094 * \param path the path that contains metadata about remappings.
5095 *
5096 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5097 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5098 */
5099CINDEX_LINKAGE CXRemapping clang_getRemappings(const char *path);
5100
5101/**
Ted Kremenekf7639e12012-03-06 20:06:33 +00005102 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5103 *
5104 * \param filePaths pointer to an array of file paths containing remapping info.
5105 *
5106 * \param numFiles number of file paths.
5107 *
5108 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5109 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5110 */
5111CINDEX_LINKAGE
5112CXRemapping clang_getRemappingsFromFileList(const char **filePaths,
5113 unsigned numFiles);
5114
5115/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005116 * \brief Determine the number of remappings.
5117 */
5118CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_remap_getNumFiles(CXRemapping);
5119
5120/**
5121 * \brief Get the original and the associated filename from the remapping.
5122 *
5123 * \param original If non-NULL, will be set to the original filename.
5124 *
5125 * \param transformed If non-NULL, will be set to the filename that the original
5126 * is associated with.
5127 */
5128CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_getFilenames(CXRemapping, unsigned index,
5129 CXString *original, CXString *transformed);
5130
5131/**
5132 * \brief Dispose the remapping.
5133 */
5134CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_dispose(CXRemapping);
5135
5136/**
5137 * @}
5138 */
5139
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005140/** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions
5141 *
5142 * @{
5143 */
5144
5145enum CXVisitorResult {
5146 CXVisit_Break,
5147 CXVisit_Continue
5148};
5149
5150typedef struct {
5151 void *context;
5152 enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5153} CXCursorAndRangeVisitor;
5154
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005155typedef enum {
5156 /**
5157 * \brief Function returned successfully.
5158 */
5159 CXResult_Success = 0,
5160 /**
5161 * \brief One of the parameters was invalid for the function.
5162 */
5163 CXResult_Invalid = 1,
5164 /**
5165 * \brief The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned
5166 * CXVisit_Break)
5167 */
5168 CXResult_VisitBreak = 2
5169
5170} CXResult;
5171
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005172/**
5173 * \brief Find references of a declaration in a specific file.
5174 *
5175 * \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one.
5176 *
5177 * \param file to search for references.
5178 *
5179 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5180 * each reference found.
5181 * The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside
5182 * a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005183 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005184 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005185 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005186CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile(CXCursor cursor, CXFile file,
5187 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005188
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005189/**
5190 * \brief Find #import/#include directives in a specific file.
5191 *
5192 * \param TU translation unit containing the file to query.
5193 *
5194 * \param file to search for #import/#include directives.
5195 *
5196 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5197 * each directive found.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005198 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005199 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005200 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005201CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5202 CXFile file,
5203 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005204
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005205#ifdef __has_feature
5206# if __has_feature(blocks)
5207
5208typedef enum CXVisitorResult
5209 (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5210
5211CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005212CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile,
5213 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005214
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005215CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005216CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile,
5217 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005218
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005219# endif
5220#endif
5221
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005222/**
5223 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile.
5224 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005225typedef void *CXIdxClientFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005226
5227/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005228 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity.
5229 */
5230typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity;
5231
5232/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005233 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container
5234 * of entities.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005235 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005236typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005237
5238/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005239 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH
5240 * or module).
5241 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005242typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005243
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005244/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005245 * \brief Source location passed to index callbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005246 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005247typedef struct {
5248 void *ptr_data[2];
5249 unsigned int_data;
5250} CXIdxLoc;
5251
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005252/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005253 * \brief Data for ppIncludedFile callback.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005254 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005255typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005256 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005257 * \brief Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005258 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005259 CXIdxLoc hashLoc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005260 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005261 * \brief Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005262 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005263 const char *filename;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005264 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005265 * \brief The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005266 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005267 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005268 int isImport;
5269 int isAngled;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5e2ec482012-10-18 00:17:05 +00005270 /**
5271 * \brief Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module
5272 * import.
5273 */
5274 int isModuleImport;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005275} CXIdxIncludedFileInfo;
5276
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005277/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005278 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005279 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005280typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005281 /**
5282 * \brief Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule.
5283 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005284 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005285 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005286 * \brief The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH.
5287 */
5288 CXModule module;
5289 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005290 * \brief Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005291 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005292 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005293 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005294 * \brief Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005295 * a module import. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005296 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis184b1442012-10-03 21:05:44 +00005297 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005298
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005299} CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo;
5300
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005301typedef enum {
5302 CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0,
5303 CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1,
5304 CXIdxEntity_Function = 2,
5305 CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3,
5306 CXIdxEntity_Field = 4,
5307 CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5,
5308
5309 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6,
5310 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7,
5311 CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8,
5312
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005313 CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9,
5314 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10,
5315 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11,
5316 CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005317
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005318 CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13,
5319 CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14,
5320 CXIdxEntity_Union = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005321
5322 CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16,
5323 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17,
5324 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18,
5325 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19,
5326 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20,
5327 CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21,
Joao Matose9a3ed42012-08-31 22:18:20 +00005328 CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22,
5329 CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23,
5330 CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24,
5331 CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25,
5332 CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26
5333
5334} CXIdxEntityKind;
5335
Argyrios Kyrtzidis52002882011-12-07 20:44:12 +00005336typedef enum {
5337 CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0,
5338 CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1,
5339 CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2,
5340 CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3
5341} CXIdxEntityLanguage;
5342
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005343/**
5344 * \brief Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to:
5345 * CXIdxEntity_Function
5346 * CXIdxEntity_CXXClass
5347 * CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod
5348 * CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod
5349 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor
5350 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction
5351 * CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias
5352 */
5353typedef enum {
5354 CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0,
5355 CXIdxEntity_Template = 1,
5356 CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2,
5357 CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3
5358} CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind;
5359
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005360typedef enum {
5361 CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0,
5362 CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1,
5363 CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2,
5364 CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3
5365} CXIdxAttrKind;
5366
5367typedef struct {
5368 CXIdxAttrKind kind;
5369 CXCursor cursor;
5370 CXIdxLoc loc;
5371} CXIdxAttrInfo;
5372
5373typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4d873b72011-12-15 00:05:00 +00005374 CXIdxEntityKind kind;
5375 CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind;
5376 CXIdxEntityLanguage lang;
5377 const char *name;
5378 const char *USR;
5379 CXCursor cursor;
5380 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5381 unsigned numAttributes;
5382} CXIdxEntityInfo;
5383
5384typedef struct {
5385 CXCursor cursor;
5386} CXIdxContainerInfo;
5387
5388typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005389 const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo;
5390 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5391 CXCursor classCursor;
5392 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5393} CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo;
5394
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005395typedef enum {
5396 CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1
5397} CXIdxDeclInfoFlags;
5398
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005399typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005400 const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005401 CXCursor cursor;
5402 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005403 const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer;
5404 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005405 * \brief Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005406 * cases like out-of-line C++ member functions.
5407 */
5408 const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005409 int isRedeclaration;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005410 int isDefinition;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005411 int isContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005412 const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005413 /**
5414 * \brief Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005415 * by the compiler, e.g. implicit Objective-C methods for properties.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005416 */
5417 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005418 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5419 unsigned numAttributes;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005420
5421 unsigned flags;
5422
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005423} CXIdxDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005424
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005425typedef enum {
5426 CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0,
5427 CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1,
5428 CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2
5429} CXIdxObjCContainerKind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005430
5431typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005432 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005433 CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind;
5434} CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005435
5436typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005437 const CXIdxEntityInfo *base;
5438 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005439 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005440} CXIdxBaseClassInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005441
5442typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005443 const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol;
5444 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005445 CXIdxLoc loc;
5446} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo;
5447
5448typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005449 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005450 unsigned numProtocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005451} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005452
5453typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005454 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5455 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo;
5456 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5457} CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005458
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005459typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9b9f7a92011-12-13 18:47:45 +00005460 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5461 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5462 CXCursor classCursor;
5463 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5464 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5465} CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo;
5466
5467typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005468 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005469 const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter;
5470 const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter;
5471} CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo;
5472
5473typedef struct {
5474 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005475 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases;
5476 unsigned numBases;
5477} CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo;
5478
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005479/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005480 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005481 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005482typedef enum {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005483 /**
5484 * \brief The entity is referenced directly in user's code.
5485 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005486 CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005487 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005488 * \brief An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an Objective-C method
5489 * via the dot syntax.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005490 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005491 CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005492} CXIdxEntityRefKind;
5493
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005494/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005495 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005496 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005497typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005498 CXIdxEntityRefKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005499 /**
5500 * \brief Reference cursor.
5501 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005502 CXCursor cursor;
5503 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005504 /**
5505 * \brief The entity that gets referenced.
5506 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005507 const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005508 /**
5509 * \brief Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example:
5510 *
5511 * \code
5512 * Foo *var;
5513 * \endcode
5514 *
5515 * The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005516 * For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods,
5517 * the parentEntity will be the function/method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005518 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005519 const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005520 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005521 * \brief Lexical container context of the reference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005522 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005523 const CXIdxContainerInfo *container;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005524} CXIdxEntityRefInfo;
5525
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005526/**
5527 * \brief A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and
5528 * #clang_indexTranslationUnit.
5529 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005530typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005531 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005532 * \brief Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted.
5533 * Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort.
5534 */
5535 int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved);
5536
5537 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005538 * \brief Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005539 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005540 void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005541 CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005542
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005543 CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005544 CXFile mainFile, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005545
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005546 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005547 * \brief Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005548 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005549 CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005550 const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005551
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005552 /**
5553 * \brief Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported.
5554 *
5555 * AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all
5556 * the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005557 * file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to
5558 * the AST file.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005559 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005560 CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005561 const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005562
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005563 /**
5564 * \brief Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit.
5565 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005566 CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005567 void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005568
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005569 void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005570 const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005571
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005572 /**
5573 * \brief Called to index a reference of an entity.
5574 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005575 void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005576 const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005577
5578} IndexerCallbacks;
5579
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005580CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005581CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *
5582clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005583
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005584CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo *
5585clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5586
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005587CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005588const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo *
5589clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5590
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005591CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *
5592clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005593
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005594CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo *
5595clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5596
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005597CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo *
5598clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *);
5599
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005600CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo *
5601clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5602
5603/**
5604 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5605 * container.
5606 */
5607CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer
5608clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *);
5609
5610/**
5611 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5612 * container.
5613 */
5614CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5615clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *,CXIdxClientContainer);
5616
5617/**
5618 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5619 */
5620CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity
5621clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *);
5622
5623/**
5624 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5625 */
5626CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5627clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *, CXIdxClientEntity);
5628
5629/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005630 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5631 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005632 */
5633typedef void *CXIndexAction;
5634
5635/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005636 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5637 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005638 *
5639 * \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated.
5640 */
5641CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx);
5642
5643/**
5644 * \brief Destroy the given index action.
5645 *
5646 * The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units
5647 * created within that index action have been destroyed.
5648 */
5649CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction);
5650
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005651typedef enum {
5652 /**
5653 * \brief Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed.
5654 */
5655 CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0,
5656
5657 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005658 * \brief Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should
5659 * be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does
5660 * not also include a declaration/definition of the entity.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005661 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisfb7d1452012-01-14 00:11:49 +00005662 CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1,
5663
5664 /**
5665 * \brief Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set
5666 * function-local symbols will be ignored.
5667 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7e747952012-02-14 22:23:11 +00005668 CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2,
5669
5670 /**
5671 * \brief Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed.
5672 * If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored.
5673 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis6c9ed7d2012-03-27 21:38:03 +00005674 CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4,
5675
5676 /**
5677 * \brief Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing.
5678 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005679 CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8,
5680
5681 /**
5682 * \brief Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005683 * indexing session associated with a \c CXIndexAction object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005684 * Bodies in system headers are always skipped.
5685 */
5686 CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10
5687
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005688} CXIndexOptFlags;
5689
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005690/**
5691 * \brief Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005692 * to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005693 *
5694 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5695 * be passed to the invoked callbacks.
5696 *
5697 * \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client
5698 * implements.
5699 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005700 * \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005701 * passed in index_callbacks.
5702 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005703 * \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is
5704 * performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005705 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005706 * \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be
5707 * reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005708 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005709 * \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005710 * recover. If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005711 * a non-zero \c CXErrorCode.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005712 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005713 * The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005714 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005715CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005716 CXClientData client_data,
5717 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5718 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
5719 unsigned index_options,
5720 const char *source_filename,
5721 const char * const *command_line_args,
5722 int num_command_line_args,
5723 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5724 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5725 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU,
5726 unsigned TU_options);
5727
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005728/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00005729 * \brief Same as clang_indexSourceFile but requires a full command line
5730 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
5731 * library paths are relative to the binary.
5732 */
5733CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFileFullArgv(
5734 CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5735 unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options,
5736 const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args,
5737 int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5738 unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options);
5739
5740/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005741 * \brief Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005742 * #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005743 *
5744 * The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as
5745 * when indexing a source file. The high level order will be:
5746 *
5747 * -Preprocessor callbacks invocations
5748 * -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations
5749 * -Diagnostic callback invocations
5750 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005751 * The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005752 *
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005753 * \returns If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005754 * non-zero, otherwise returns 0.
5755 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005756CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexTranslationUnit(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005757 CXClientData client_data,
5758 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5759 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005760 unsigned index_options,
5761 CXTranslationUnit);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005762
5763/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005764 * \brief Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by
5765 * the given CXIdxLoc.
5766 *
5767 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
5768 * location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument
5769 * retrieves the location of the argument.
5770 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005771CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005772 CXIdxClientFile *indexFile,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005773 CXFile *file,
5774 unsigned *line,
5775 unsigned *column,
5776 unsigned *offset);
5777
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005778/**
5779 * \brief Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc.
5780 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005781CINDEX_LINKAGE
5782CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc);
5783
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005784/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00005785 * \brief Visitor invoked for each field found by a traversal.
5786 *
5787 * This visitor function will be invoked for each field found by
5788 * \c clang_Type_visitFields. Its first argument is the cursor being
5789 * visited, its second argument is the client data provided to
5790 * \c clang_Type_visitFields.
5791 *
5792 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXVisitorResult values
5793 * to direct \c clang_Type_visitFields.
5794 */
5795typedef enum CXVisitorResult (*CXFieldVisitor)(CXCursor C,
5796 CXClientData client_data);
5797
5798/**
5799 * \brief Visit the fields of a particular type.
5800 *
5801 * This function visits all the direct fields of the given cursor,
5802 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
5803 * visited field. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if
5804 * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
5805 *
5806 * \param T the record type whose field may be visited.
5807 *
5808 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
5809 * field of \p T.
5810 *
5811 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5812 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
5813 *
5814 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
5815 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
5816 */
5817CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_visitFields(CXType T,
5818 CXFieldVisitor visitor,
5819 CXClientData client_data);
5820
5821
5822/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005823 * @}
5824 */
5825
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00005826/**
5827 * @}
5828 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005829
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00005830#ifdef __cplusplus
5831}
5832#endif
5833#endif
5834